JP7290349B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not a game ball is won in the starting hole and a special game is to be executed, the special symbol display device displays the determination result after the special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed as the special symbols are variably displayed, and as the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the determination result is displayed. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

JP 2015-96091 A

By the way, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in terms of improving the entertainment of the presentation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the entertainment of presentation.

The present invention employs the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising main control means and effect control means, wherein the main control means includes determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game, and a determination result of the determination means. and identification information control means for stopping display after a predetermined period of time after the identification information is variably displayed based on, and control information transmission means for transmitting predetermined control information, wherein the effect control means transmits the control information. The control information transmitted from the means can be received, and a game effect can be executed in response to the reception, and the game effect includes changing and displaying decorative symbols in accordance with the changing display of the identification information, and a decorative symbol performance of temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in a manner indicating the determination result of the determining means, and then stopping and displaying the decorative symbols along with the stop display of the identification information; and executing the special game. A ready-to-win effect is expected and is executed when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state during the variable display, an emphatic effect for emphasizing the decorative pattern during the variable display, and the special game are executed. and a forewarning performance for foretelling the possibility that the special game will be executed, wherein the emphasizing performance includes emphasizing the decorative design when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative design in a manner to inform that the special game will be executed. There is a specific emphasis effect, and a predetermined emphasis effect that is different from the specific emphasis effect and emphasizes the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win mode in the ready-to-win effect. At least during a period during which the specific emphasis effect is being executed, the execution of the notice effect can be restricted, and the specific emphasis effect includes a first specific emphasis effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific emphasis effect. In one variation, the second specific emphasis effect can be executed after the first specific emphasis effect, and the first specific emphasis effect and the second specific effect are performed during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern. The emphasizing performance is terminated, the decorative design is not emphatically displayed until the stop display of the decorative design is completed after the second specific emphasizing performance is completed, and the first specific emphasis is performed during the stop display of the decorative design. The effect and the second specific emphasized effect are not executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of presentation.

Schematic front view of pachinko game machine 1 Schematic plan view showing part of pachinko game machine 1 Enlarged view of indicator 4 in FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1 Flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100 Detailed flow chart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing special symbol processing in step S4 in FIG. Flowchart showing details of jackpot determination processing in step S407 of FIG. Flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the stopping process in step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the normal design process of step S5 in FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG. Detailed flow chart of electric tulip processing in Fig. 5 It is a diagram showing the breakdown of the jackpot pattern selected according to the winning to each starting port, and the diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each pattern. A diagram showing an example of a decorative design A diagram showing an example of the mode of decorative symbols in the game state and each effect section A diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in a normal game state A diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the probability variation gaming state Diagram showing the flow of variable production including SPSP reach production A diagram showing the details of the hit notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach production A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the SPSP ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. 23, showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a win notification is given. A diagram showing the details of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach production 23, showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a failure notification is given. A diagram showing the flow of the production when the re-lottery production is performed during the winning notification A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification Diagram showing the flow of variable production including special production A diagram showing the details of the hit notification performed as a result of the special effect A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. A diagram showing another example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including a special effect is performed. A diagram showing the flow of variable production when it is determined to be a jackpot in the probability variable gaming state A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed The figure which shows an example of the production|presentation following FIG. A diagram showing an example of the flow of the variable effect when the second light emitting effect is performed after the first light emitting effect when the winning notification is performed in the variable probability game state. A diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the screen when it is determined that the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the variable probability game state. A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emitting effect during non-reach in the normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of non-reach light emitting effect when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of non-reach light emitting effect when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in normal game state A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emitting effect during non-reach in the variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of non-reach light emitting effect when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in probability variable gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of non-reach light emitting effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in the variable probability game state Table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emitting effects for each variation pattern in the normal game state A table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emitting effects for each variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect and the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state. Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a ready-to-win lighting effect in a normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect in the normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the reach light emitting effect in the probability variable gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state Table for explaining the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect in the normal game state A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect and the hit light emitting effect in the variable probability game state A diagram showing an example of the flow of production over variations of a plurality of special symbols when a look-ahead chance eye is displayed A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed The figure which shows an example of the production|presentation following FIG. A diagram showing an example of a variable effect when a NEXT symbol indicating a pseudo-run is displayed in the normal game state. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed A diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of the decorative pattern 55 when the look-ahead chance lighting effect, the ready-to-win lighting effect, and the hit lighting effect are executed. The figure which shows the comparison of the swing period of the decorative design when the production control section 130 does not receive the command from the game control section 100 normally. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of hold command processing in step 1302 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 140 Detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by lamp control unit 150

Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko game machine 1]
First, the schematic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As exemplified in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game board 2 on which accessories related to winning and determination (lottery) are provided, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2 . The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. It is

When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 28 are guided to a shooting device (not shown) and hit with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21. It is launched into the game area 10 . The game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the shot game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and touches the game nails, the windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the movement direction. It should be noted that the shooting of game balls is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22 .

The upper tray 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the shooting device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged close to the lower tray 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower tray 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower tray 29 are arranged below the lower tray 29. It drops into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the player keeps rotating the lever 21 at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31 . On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32 .

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided on the passage path of the left-handed game ball as accessories related to winning and judgment. It is In addition, on the passage path of the game ball hit to the right, there are the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 are provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any one of the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the big winning hole 13, and the normal winning hole 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. and win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 according to the place where the prize has been won. The game balls that did not win a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18. - 特許庁

A first starting port 11 as a first starting region is a starting port that is always open, and a second starting port 12 as a second starting region is where an electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball wins by passing through a first start port 11 or when a game ball wins by passing through a second start port 12, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to a player. is executed, and the result of the determination is displayed on the display 4, which will be described later.

In the following description, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 11 is called "first special symbol judgment", and the condition that the game ball enters the second start port 12. The determination to be executed is called "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lottery) are collectively called "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The big winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big winning opening 13 . The big winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined big win symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "big win" is stop-displayed on the display device 4, the big winning game of opening the big winning opening 13 by actuating the plate. is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured so that its posture can be changed between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which a pair of blade members closes the second start port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second start port 12 is opened. ing.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second start port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintain the open posture for a specified time and then return to the closed posture for a specified number of times. In this way, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas when the electric tulip 17 is in operation, the game ball is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to pass. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is called "normal symbol determination (normal symbol lottery)".

The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning of game balls. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, determination (lottery) is not performed even if a game ball wins the normal winning opening 14. - 特許庁

In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the second start port 12 and wins, there is It may be determined which of Also, at the end of the jackpot game, the game state may shift from the low probability game state and non-assisted game state to the low probability game state and auxiliary game state (the game state will be described later). In such a gaming machine 1, for example, when a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display device 4 (specifically, the second special symbol display device 42), the big winning opening 13 is opened. The jackpot game to be used is executed. On the other hand, when a small winning symbol indicating a small winning is stopped and displayed on the display 4, first, a small winning game using a small winning opening having a V winning opening therein is executed. For example, a plate for opening and closing the small winning opening is provided at the opening of the small winning opening. The small winning opening is normally closed by this plate. When the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the display device 4, a small winning game is executed in which the plate is operated to open the small winning opening. On the condition that the game ball passes through the V winning opening during the small winning game, the big winning game using the big winning opening 13 is started following the small winning game. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the small winning game compared to when the small winning game is not performed. In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening during the small winning game, the big winning game following the small winning game is not executed, and the game state does not shift to the time saving game state.

[Configuration example of effect means of pachinko game machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, and an effect button 26 for performing various effects. It is The frame member 3 also incorporates a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible to the player. On the liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various display objects such as decorative symbols for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, characters and items for performing advance notice effects, and reserved icons displayed as many as the special symbol determination is suspended. is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is movable with respect to the game board 2, and is usually retracted to a retracted position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right sides of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Sometimes it is configured to advance to the front of the screen. A light-emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by operating or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects with light, such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color. The speaker 24 outputs musical pieces, voices, sound effects, etc. in synchronization with the display effects performed by the liquid crystal display device 5 to perform sound effects.

In this embodiment, in order to suggest the high or low of the possibility of winning a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “reliability”), a production image is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, or a production means that can emit light (specifically, In some cases, the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37) are caused to emit light. In this embodiment, white, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow colors are used as colors suggesting high or low reliability. The reliability of each color is higher in the above order. In the present embodiment, colors below red are used for both the case of a big win and the case of a loss, and do not function as colors suggesting a big win (that is, the reliability is 100%). The reliability of the zebra is relatively high regardless of which direction it is used, and there are two types of effects: one using the zebra only when it is a big win, and the other using the zebra when it is a big win and when it is a loss. be. Specifically, zebra, for example, functions as a color that suggests a big win when used in the production of displaying a cut-in image, and has relatively very high reliability when used as the color of a pending icon (for example, about 76%). Rainbow colors have a 100% confidence level and are used only for jackpots (ie, not used for losses). As the color that suggests a big win, instead of zebra and rainbow color, another single color (for example, red) may be used, or another composite color (for example, a composite color of red, yellow, and white) may be used. may be

[Configuration Example of Operation Means of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with a performance button 26 and a performance key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect button 26 is configured to be protruded upward by a drive mechanism (not shown). When the effect using the effect button 26 is executed (specifically, from the start to the end of the effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid), the upper surface is in the normal state and the normal state. Sometimes it sticks out. The presence or absence of a protrusion may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of jackpot determination, the type of jackpot pattern, the type of variation pattern, or all or part of these. As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of reliability for the big win depending on the mode of the production button 26. - 特許庁In this embodiment, one type of operation (that is, pressing) is possible with respect to the production button 26 regardless of the presence or absence of protrusion.

Note that in other embodiments, the operating means may be configured in advance so that a plurality of types of operations are possible with respect to one operating means. For example, the type of operation that can be performed on the production button 26 in the normal state and the type of operation that can be performed on the production button 26 in the protruding state may be different. Specifically, for example, the effect button 26 can be pressed in the normal state, and when the effect button 26 is controlled to be in a protruded state, the effect button 26 is controlled to be unpressible and the upper surface of the effect button 26 is pushed. It may be configured so that the player can pull it toward himself. For example, the player may be prompted to perform any one operation selected from a plurality of types of operations prepared in advance in order to indicate the reliability of the big win. Which type of operation is to be prompted may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of jackpot pattern, the type of variation pattern, or all or part of these.

The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko game machine 1, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 may be performed.

In addition to the effect button 26, an operation means that can be operated by the player may be provided. For example, it may be provided with two operating means having different degrees of reliability with respect to a big win. For example, when the reliability is relatively low, the player is prompted to operate the first operation means (for example, the effect button 26), and when the reliability is relatively high, the player is prompted to operate the second operation means. may be prompted. The second operating means may be provided, for example, at a position (for example, to the left of the lower tray 29) that is more difficult for the player to operate than the first operating means. This makes it possible to indicate the degree of reliability by which operation means the player has been prompted to operate. Note that when the second operating means is operated during the operation promotion presentation prompting the operation of the first operating means, the same presentation as when the first operating means is operated may be executed in response to the operation. A different effect than when the first operating means is operated may be executed, or no effect may be executed.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The indicator 4 mainly displays information about special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. It comprises a special symbol reservation display 43, a second special symbol reservation display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol reservation display 46, a game state display 47, a round display 48 and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 41 variably displays the symbol, and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Notification of judgment results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the symbol, and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notification of judgment results. On the first special symbol display device 41 and the second special symbol display device 42, as the determination symbol, a big hit symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", or a determination result of the special symbol determination is "losing". ” is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by variably displaying the symbol and then stop-displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol reservation display 46 displays the number of normal symbol determination pending. The game state display 47 displays the game state when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on. The round indicator 48 displays the number of rounds of the big winning game when the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42 stops displaying the big winning symbols.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called "second special symbol". are collectively called “special patterns”. Also, the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 are referred to as "normal symbols".

[Configuration of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game control unit 100 for controlling the execution of determination (lottery), control of the jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like. A production control unit 130 that comprehensively controls production based on commands received from 100, an image sound control unit 140 that controls production by images and sounds, and a lamp control that controls production by various lamps and movable accessories 7. A portion 150 is provided. In addition to those shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control section (not shown) for controlling the payout of prize balls.

[Configuration of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 has a CPU 101 , a ROM 102 and a RAM 103 . Based on the programs stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the number of prize balls to be paid out, such as internal lottery and winning determination. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing.

The game control unit 100 includes a first start switch (SW) 111, a second start switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. , a large winning slot switch (SW) 116, a large winning slot control section 117, a normal winning slot switch (SW) 118, and a display 4 are connected.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100 . The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 12 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 in a drive-transmissible manner in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The big winning hole switch 116 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100 . The big winning gate control unit 117 opens and closes the big winning gate 13 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the big winning gate 13 in a drive-transmittable manner according to a control signal from the game control unit 100 . do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 .

The CPU 101 of the game control unit 100, when a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118, determines the location where the game ball has won. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute the first special symbol determination. Also, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, a special game is executed by opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control section 117.例文帳に追加Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute normal symbol determination. Then, when the result of the normal pattern determination is a hit, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing part 113. - 特許庁

In addition, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the start and stop of fluctuation of the special symbols to the effect control section 130 . In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control section 130 information about the variation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the variation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control unit 130 data indicating the shortening setting of the fluctuation time of the special symbols, information for notifying that the game ball has won the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, and the like. .

Also, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display device 4 . That is, when the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, the first special symbol display 41 variably displays the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. In addition, when the CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the normal symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the determination.

In addition, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol determination reserved number to be displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 43, the second special symbol determination reserved number to be displayed on the second special symbol reservation display 44, and the normal symbol determination. is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the game state display 47 to display the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, the CPU 101 causes the round indicator 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Configuration of effect control unit 130]
Effect control unit 130 includes CPU 131 , ROM 132 , RAM 133 , and RTC (real time clock) 134 . The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling effects based on programs stored in the ROM 132 . The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 131 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

The effect control section 130 sets the content of the effect based on the data indicating the result of the special symbol determination sent from the game control section 100 and the like. Effect control unit 130 transmits a command for instructing execution of the set effect content to image sound control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 .

The image sound control section 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal display device 5 and sound output control of the speaker 24 . The image sound control unit 140 includes a CPU 141, a ROM 142, a RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the ROM 142, the CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the images and sounds representing the effects for which the contents of the effects are set in the effect control unit 130. FIG. The RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 . Acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from speaker 24 . The CPU 141 controls the operations of the VDP 144 and the sound DSP 145 by generating a control signal based on the command from the effect control unit 130 and the program stored in the ROM 142 and outputting it to the VDP 144 and the sound DSP 145 .

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 has a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect image, and an output circuit that outputs the effect image drawn by the drawing engine to the liquid crystal display device 5 . Based on the control signal from the CPU 141, the drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the ROM. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the audio DSP 145 includes an audio ROM for storing various audio data related to sound effects such as music, voice, and sound effects, and a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The audio DSP 145 reads audio data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU 141 from the audio ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the processed audio data to the speaker 24 .

[Configuration of Lamp Control Unit 150]
The lamp control unit 150 has a CPU 151 , a ROM 152 and a RAM 153 . The CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the board lamp 25 , the frame lamp 37 , the effect button 26 , and the movable accessory 7 based on the programs stored in the ROM 152 . The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 151 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing.

The ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. The light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission pattern of each of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. FIG. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7 .

The CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and displays the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the movable role. Light emission of the light emitting element of the object 7 is controlled. In addition, the CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and operates the movable accessory 7 and the effect button 26. Controls motor drive.

[Explanation of game state]
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The game state includes a low-probability game state in which the probability of being judged as a big win is the first probability, and a high-probability game state in which the probability of being judged as a big win is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is

The first and second probabilities, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Also, the first probability and the second probability may change depending on the setting.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to different probabilities by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the game machine 1 is powered on, a set value switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game control board 100 is operated (for example, pressed), and a set value related to the probability of a big hit is set. (for example, any value from "1" to "6"). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to different probabilities.

For example, the larger the set value, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the ratio between the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state, and the first probability, which is the jackpot probability in the low-probability gaming state, is regardless of the set value. It can be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and the set value is When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Also, the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state is set to 1/27.5 (=1/220×8 times) when the set value is "1", and the set value is "2". Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the set value is "3", it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

A setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided for setting the jackpot probability. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used together with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed down) and the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is turned on, the jackpot probability is set. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on and the RAM clear switch is turned off, the mode is shifted to a change mode, the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off, and when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the RAM clear mode (the mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the game machine is started) is entered, the setting key is turned off, And when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the power recovery mode (the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is not initialized, and the game machine is operated while maintaining the data at the time of the last power interruption) start mode). The game machine of the present embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 4) of the game control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is turned off for a certain period of time (for example, 24 hours). It is constructed so that data in the RAM 103 can be maintained even if it is cut off.

Further, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a non-assisting game state and an auxiliary game state. Auxiliary game state has a relatively high probability of being determined to be hit in normal symbol determination as compared with non-assistive game state (for example, 1/1.1). In addition, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively long when it is determined to be a win in the normal symbol determination (for example, 1.8 seconds × 3 times), and the normal symbol fluctuation time is relatively long. is short (eg, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed, and the probability of winning is relatively high, and the second start port 12 is opened 1.8 seconds x 3 times. A game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Also, in the auxiliary game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbols is shortened compared to the non-assisted game state.

On the other hand, the non-assisting game state has a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination compared to the auxiliary game state (eg, 1/50), and when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-assisted game state, even if the normal symbol determination is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second start port 12 is 0.1 seconds × Since it is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and is set to the auxiliary game state or the non-auxiliary game state.

The low-probability game state and non-assist game state are referred to as "normal game state", and the pachinko game machine 1 is initially set to the normal game state. In addition, the high probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as "probability variation game state". In addition, the low probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as "time saving game state".

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in one of three types of effect modes corresponding to the current game state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state, in the probability variable mode, when the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving mode Each performance is performed in

It should be noted that the normal mode has a plurality of presentation modes (stages, eg, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not indicate the possibility of a big win, and various effects (announcement effect, ready-to-win effect, hit notification, etc.) described later can be executed in either normal mode of stage A or stage B.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main processing executed by the game control section 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100. As shown in FIG. The game control unit 100 repeats a series of processes shown in FIG. 5 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Execute. It should be noted that the processing of the game control unit 100, which will be described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot. Reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a variation pattern of a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbols are variably displayed. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining winning or losing the normal symbol lottery. A jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number are generated, for example, by a random number generator each time the process of step S1 is performed.

After step S1, the CPU 101 executes a starting port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the starting port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111 or the second starting port switch 112, and generates random numbers (jackpot random numbers, Symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers) are acquired at the time when the detection signal is input and stored in the RAM 103 . This starting port switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S2, the CPU 101 executes gate switch (SW) processing (step S3). In the gate switch process, the CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115, and when the detection signal is input, acquires the normal symbol random number value updated in the process of step S1. is stored in the RAM 103. This gate switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol processing, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and the jackpot pattern in the case of a jackpot. In addition, the CPU 101 executes special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the starting port switch process of step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol. , the special symbols showing the result of the special symbol determination are stopped and displayed. The special symbol processing will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

Following step S4, the CPU 101 normally executes symbol processing (step S5). In the normal design process, the CPU 101 executes normal design determination using the normal design random number acquired in the gate switch process of step S3, and causes the normal design display device 45 to variably display the normal design as a result of the normal design determination. The normal symbol showing is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S5, the CPU 101 executes a big winning opening process of opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control section 117 when the special symbol determination in the special symbol process of step S4 results in a big hit. (Step S6). The special winning opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip process, the CPU 101 operates the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 when winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol process of step S5. Motorized tulip processing will be described in greater detail below with reference to FIG.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for controlling the number of winning game balls and the payout of prize balls according to the winning (step S8). Specifically, when the game ball wins in any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14, the CPU 101 determines the number of prizes according to the winning place. pay out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out 3 prize balls when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, and 15 prize balls when a game ball enters the big win hole 13. pay out.

After step S8, the CPU 101 executes output processing (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 in the starting opening switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the big winning opening process of step S6, etc. to the effect control section 130.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the details of the starting opening switch process executed in the game control section 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a detailed flowchart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON" (whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 11). judge. When it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has become "ON" (step S201: YES), the number of reservations U1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the first special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Umax1 (for example, 4) for symbol determination (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 by adding "1" (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires values of various random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated by the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, by storing in the RAM 103 various random numbers obtained in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11, the first special symbol related to the reserved ball whose reserved number U1 is increased in step S203 is displayed. The right of judgment will be reserved. Although details will be described later, the reserved right to determine the first special symbol is digested in the special symbol processing of step S4, and the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process based on various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-determination process of step S205 is a determination process for the right of the first special symbol determination that has been reserved, and determines whether it is a big hit, the big hit pattern in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern, etc., and shows the determination result. This is a process of generating determination information. After that, the CPU 101 sets a hold command including the pre-determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The suspension command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. It should be noted that in the pre-determination process in step S205, the various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be directly generated as pre-determination information, and the pre-determination information may be included in the pending command.

If "NO" is determined in step S201, if "NO" is determined in step S202, or if the process of step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 112 is turned "ON" (whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 12). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 112 has become "ON" (step S207: YES), the number U2 of pending second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the second special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax2 (for example, 4) (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 by adding "1" (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated in the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 uses various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 to execute the pre-determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 (step S211), and stores the pending command including the pre-determination information in the RAM 103. set (step S212).

If "NO" is determined in step S207, if "NO" is determined in step S208, or if the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 terminates the starting port switch process and the gate switch process. proceed to

[Gate switch processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 7 is a detailed flow chart of the gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 101 detects whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON") is input. It is determined whether or not the switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON" (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 has become "ON" (step S301: YES), the number of reservations G for normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum number of reservations for normal symbol determination Gmax (for example, , 4) determine whether it is less than (step S302).

If the CPU 101 determines that the number G of reservations is less than the maximum number of reservations Gmax (step S302: YES), it updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S303), A normal symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). In addition, the prior determination processing may be performed in the same manner as in the above step S205 for the normal symbol random number stored in step S304, and the result of the prior determination processing may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a normal symbol pending command. .

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11. FIG. FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game is in progress (a jackpot game is in progress) based on information stored in the RAM 103, for example (step S401). When it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 terminates the special symbol processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being performed (step S401: NO), it determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S403 ), if it is determined to be "1" or more (step S403: YES), "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations U2, and only one reserved ball is consumed (step S404).

When the CPU 101 determines that the pending number U2 is not "1" or more (the second special symbol determination is not suspended) (step S403: NO), the pending number of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 It is determined whether or not U1 is "1" or more (step S405), and if it is determined to be "1" or more (step S405: YES), "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations U1 to set the number of reserved balls to 1 is digested (step S406). On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is not equal to or greater than "1" in step S405 (step S405: NO), the CPU 101 sets the customer waiting command in the RAM 103 and ends the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

CPU101 performs big hit determination processing following the processing of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). The jackpot determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Jackpot determination process)
As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a jackpot following the processing of step S404 in FIG. 8, the jackpot random number (the It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102 . Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. In addition, when the game state is the high probability game state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the low probability game state. On the other hand, when judging whether or not a big win has occurred following the processing of step S406 in FIG. ) matches the winning value of the jackpot random number pre-stored in the ROM 102 or not. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

Here, if the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 performs symbol random number determination processing based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the jackpot random number described above. (step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches any random number assigned to each jackpot symbol stored in advance in the ROM 102. Then, the big hit pattern is determined. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S431 that it is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets a losing symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a failure in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the big hit determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S408). The variation pattern setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a variable probability gaming flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state (step S461). When the probability variation game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag described later is ON, ie, whether or not the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets a working hours table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability variation gaming flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S466).

The variation pattern table is a table that defines the conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Each fluctuation pattern table contains a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit, and when it is a loss and there is no reach (predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number (For example, when it is not decided to select a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more), the loss variation pattern (no reach) selected when there is a reach (for example, a predetermined variation time using a reach random number) 13 seconds) includes the reach variation pattern that is selected when it is determined to select a variation pattern of more than ). For example, as a jackpot variation pattern included in the normal table, there are variation patterns with variation times of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 80 seconds, 120 seconds, etc., and as a reach variation pattern included in the normal table, the variation time is 27 seconds. , 57 seconds, 75 seconds, and 113 seconds. In addition, there are fluctuation patterns with fluctuation times of 8 seconds, 12 seconds, etc., as loss fluctuation patterns included in the normal table. In addition, in the time saving table and the probability variation table, there is a variation pattern (for example, variation time of 2 seconds) that is shorter than the loss variation pattern in the normal table as a loss variation pattern. An example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIG.

CPU101 judges whether the result of big-hit determination of step S407 was a loss following the process of step S463, step S464, or step S465 (step S466). If the result of this big win determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a big win (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 advances the process to the next step 468. FIG.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs reach random number determination processing (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern with a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or longer based on the acquired reach random number. Then, CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs variation pattern random number determination processing. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number obtained in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined variation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the process of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10, and advances the processes after step S409 in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the process of step S408, the CPU 101 indicates the pattern setting information set in the process of step S407, the setting information of the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A variation start command including information is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing the execution of an effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Following the process of step S409, the CPU 101 starts variable display of special symbols based on the setting information included in the variable start command set in the process of step S409 (step S410), and measures the variable time. start (step S411). It should be noted that, when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variable display of the special symbols is performed using the second special symbol display 42, following the processing of step S406. When performed, the first special symbol display 41 is used.

When the CPU 101 determines “YES” in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S408 is calculated from the start of measurement of the fluctuation time in step S411. It is determined whether or not time has passed (step S412).

When the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a fluctuation stop command for notifying that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped in the RAM 103 (step S413), and in the process of step S410 The variable display of the started special symbols is terminated (step S414), and the measured variable time is reset (step S415). Thereby, in the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, a symbol (a big winning symbol or a losing symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the big winning determination process of step S407 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is performed. Results are reported. In addition, the fluctuation stop command set by the process of step S413 is transmitted to the production|presentation control part 130 by performing the output process of FIG.5 S9.

CPU101 performs a process during a stop after the process of step S415 (step S416). The details of the processing during suspension will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, if "NO" is determined in step S405, if "NO" is determined in step S412, or if the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 After finishing the special design process, the normal design process of step S5 in FIG. 5 is executed.

[Stopping process by game control unit 100]
Next, the stop processing in step S416 of FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart showing the process during stop in step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big win based on the result of the big win determination process of step S407 (step S480). Then, when the CPU 101 determines that it is a big win (step S480: YES), it sets the big win game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON" (step S481).

Following the processing of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S482). Following the processing of step S482, CPU 101 starts opening (step S483) and sets an opening command in RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is to be started. It is sent to unit 130 .

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), "1" is subtracted from the auxiliary game residual number J stored in the RAM 103, and the J is updated (step S486). . The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols for which the auxiliary game state is maintained (the number of executions of special symbol determination), and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. . Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game remaining number J is "0" (step S487). When determining that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO ), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the high probability game residual count X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game residual count X indicates the remaining number of times special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability game state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual count X is "0" (step S491). When it is determined that the high probability game residual number X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or the high probability game residual number X is " 0” (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the processing during stop of FIG.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, and is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is being operated during a winning game. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game state (whether the auxiliary game flag is ON). When determining that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display 45 (step S502), When it is determined that the variable display of normal symbols is not in progress (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number G of normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). When it is determined that the number G of reservations is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is equal to or greater than "1" (step S503: YES), it updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S504), and executes normal symbol random number determination processing. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number obtained in the process of step S3 in response to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. , it is determined whether or not the result of normal symbol determination is winning (step S506). In the auxiliary game state, the winning value of the normal symbol random number is set more than in the non-auxiliary game state, and in the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol determination is hit. The probability of becoming is higher than the non-assisted game state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not winning (step S506: NO), it sets a losing symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is winning (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the process of step S507 or the process of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is set based on whether the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S509: NO), it sets the normal symbol fluctuation time, which is the time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 45, to, for example, 25 seconds (step S510). Conversely, when it is determined that it is in the auxiliary game state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM103.

Following the processing of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display device 45 to start variable display of normal symbols (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display (step S513). .

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed on the normal symbol display 45 (step S502: YES), it determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbols (step S516). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time starting to be measured by the process of step S513 reaches the normal symbol fluctuation time set by the process of step S512 or step S513, the normal symbol variation display It is determined whether or not the end timing has come. When determining that the end timing has not come (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that it is time to end the variation display of the normal symbols (step S516: YES), the normal symbol display device 45 terminates the variation display of the normal symbols (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to stop and display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time for which measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to the above step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of normal design determination is a hit (step S519), and if it is determined to be a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to "ON". Set (step S520). The electric tulip 17 is operated by setting the auxiliary flag to "ON" and performing an electric tulip process, which will be described later.

When the process of step S520 is performed, when it determines with NO by the process of step S516, or when it determines with NO by the process of step S519, CPU101 normally complete|finishes the design process of FIG.

In the non-assisted game state, the second starting port 12 is long open (eg, open for 5.6 seconds), and the second starting port 12 is short open (eg, open for 0.1 seconds). It can be hit and miss.

[Large Winning Opening Process by Game Control Unit 100]
Next, details of the big winning opening process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game flag (jackpot game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is in the process of opening.

If it is during the opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has passed (step S603). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot pattern. If the opening time has passed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and sets the value of Rmax, The opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.) of the big winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot pattern. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot pattern, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot pattern.

After step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and stores it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the big winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process of step S607, the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S611.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether it is during the ending (step S608). If the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S617. If it is not in the ending (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether it is in the interval between the round games (step S609). If it is during the interval (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has passed (step S610). Execute. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the big winning opening process.

On the other hand, if it is not during the interval (step S609: NO), that is, if it is during the round game, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not met (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition of the long opening round game to be described later is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening control of the large winning opening of this round was started in step S606, or that the large winning opening of this round has passed in step S606. The number of winning prizes of the game balls into the big prize winning port after starting the opening control of the winning prize port has reached a predetermined value. The CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied when either one of these two conditions is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the opening control of the big winning opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control section 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

When determining that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the big winning opening process.

When determining that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts ending (step S616) and sets an ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the CPU 101 has performed the process of step S617 or determines YES in the process of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S616 (step S618). If the ending time has passed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current special game is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process (step S620). Details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (jackpot game flag) to OFF (step S621).

If NO is determined in the process of step S601, if NO is determined in the process of step S611, if NO is determined in the process of step S618, if NO is determined in the process of step S610, NO is determined in the process of step S603. When it is determined that the process of step S615 is executed, or when the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process shown in FIG.

[Game State Setting Processing by Game Control Unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot accompanied by transition to a high probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot based on the symbols set in the jackpot determination process. If it is a probability variation jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation game flag and the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S631), sets Xmax to the high probability game residual number X, and auxiliary game residual number Jmax is set to J (step S632). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and a very large value such as 10000 is set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set to X, the game is practically controlled in a high-probability game state until the next big win.

When the process of step S632 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a normal jackpot accompanied by transition to the time-saving gaming state (step S633). When it determines with YES at step S633, CPU101 sets an auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets, for example, "100" to the auxiliary game residual number J (step S635).

When the process of step S635 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S633, the CPU 101 terminates the game state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the electric tulip processing in step S7 of FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip processing of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). When determining that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the electric tulip processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), it determines whether the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702). When it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, thereby determining whether or not the auxiliary game state (step S703).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S703: NO), for example, it sets an operation pattern in the RAM 103 to perform the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 0.1 seconds once (step S704).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the CPU 101 is in the auxiliary game state (step S703: YES), the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 is, for example, an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 1.8 seconds is performed three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 in step S704 or S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 to start operating the electric tulip 17 according to the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 has been completed. (step S707). When determining that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S708).

If NO is determined in the process of step S701, if NO is determined in the process of step S707, or if the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

[Type of Jackpot]
Next, the jackpot pattern (jackpot type) selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the details of the jackpot symbols selected according to the winning to each starting port, and shows the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and becomes a big hit, one of the big win patterns Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41. Then, a jackpot game (a kind of special game) corresponding to each jackpot pattern is performed. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 12 and results in a big hit, one of the big win patterns Z4 to Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device 42, and the respective big win patterns are displayed. A jackpot game (a kind of special game) according to is performed.

Specifically, when a jackpot is determined based on the winning to the first starting port 11, the jackpot pattern Z1 is selected at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. , the jackpot pattern Z3 is selected at a rate of 35%.

When the jackpot pattern Z1 is selected, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of game balls entering the jackpot 13 reaches 10, or after the jackpot 13 is opened) Until 29.5 seconds have elapsed), a long opening round game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened is performed 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as “R”)). For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed as the jackpot game. After the jackpot pattern Z1 or the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability variable game state (high probability game state and auxiliary game state), and substantially the probability variable game until the next jackpot. condition continues.

The jackpot by the jackpot pattern Z1 is called "10R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot by the jackpot pattern Z2 is called "4R probability variable jackpot".

Further, when the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed. After the jackpot pattern Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is played, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low-probability game state and an auxiliary game state (time-saving game state). The time-saving game state continues until the special symbols are varied 100 times, and when the 100th special symbol variation is completed, the game machine 1 is returned to the normal game state. Incidentally, the big win by the big win pattern Z3 may be called "4R normal big win".

On the other hand, when it is determined to be a jackpot based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the jackpot pattern Z4 is selected at a rate of 40%, the jackpot pattern Z5 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the jackpot is selected at a rate of 35%. Symbol Z6 is selected.

When the jackpot pattern Z4 or Z5 is selected, after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the variable probability game state. The variable probability game state is substantially continued until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern Z6 is selected, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game, and the time-saving game state continues until the special pattern changes 100 times.

The jackpot pattern Z4 is a pattern indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 10R long open round game is performed. The jackpot pattern Z5 is a pattern indicating the 4R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 4R long open round game is performed. Also, the jackpot pattern Z6 is a pattern indicating a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of fluctuation production and reach production)
Here, the variable effect and the ready-to-win effect will be described. "Variation production" is a production performed during the fluctuation of the special design (first special design or second special design), is started according to the start of fluctuation of the special design, and ends according to the end of the fluctuation of the special design. It is a production that The variable effects include effects using decorative patterns displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "liquid crystal screen 5"), effects using other images, and sounds output from the speaker 24. , production using the movable accessories 7 , production using the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 , and production using the production button 26 .

The “ready-to-win effect” is a effect using decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and is a effect that makes the player expect a big win. As will be specifically described later, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays a decorative pattern that changes in response to the start of variation in the special symbols and stops in response to the end of variation in the special symbols. The decorative design is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special design being executed. Whether the result of the special design determination is a big hit or a loss is reported depending on the mode of stopping the decorative design. Specifically, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays three decoration patterns, left, middle and right.

Three decorative patterns start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, and when three decorative patterns of the same kind stop together (for example, "777" or "444"), a big hit is announced. . In addition, the state in which three decorative patterns of the same kind are aligned is called "double eyes" or "symbol matching". On the other hand, if the three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned and the game stops, it basically means that a failure has been reported. The ready-to-win effect is a effect that makes the player expect that three decorative patterns of the same kind are arranged.

For example, the ready-to-win production is a production in which decorative patterns of the same type temporarily stop on the left and right and the decorative patterns fluctuate in the middle area. It is a production that people expect.

In this embodiment, there are three types of ready-to-win effects: normal ready-to-win effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), SP ready-to-win effects, and SPSP ready-to-win effects. The N-reach effect is the effect with the lowest possibility (also called degree of expectation or degree of reliability) of a subsequent big win among the plurality of ready-to-win effects. For example, the degree of expectation of the N-reach effect is 0.1% or less. As the N-reach production, there may be a plurality of N-reach productions with different (or the same) production times and/or expectations.

The SP reach effect is a effect with a higher degree of expectation than the N reach effect, and is a reach effect with a longer effect time than the N reach effect. For example, the expected degree of SP reach effect is 5 to 10%. In addition, there may be a plurality of SP reach effects as the SP reach effects. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on each SP reach production, and the production time may also be different. It may be configured such that the longer the effect time of the SP ready-to-win effect, the higher the degree of expectation.

The SPSP ready-to-win effect is an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect with a longer effect time than the SP ready-to-win effect. For example, the expected degree of SPSP reach effect is 30 to 50%. In addition, there may be a plurality of SPSP ready-to-win effects as the SPSP ready-to-win effects. Depending on the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the degree of expectation for the big win may differ, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the effect time of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the higher the degree of expectation.

(Aspect of decorative design)
Here, there is a case where the aspect of the decorative pattern changes depending on the production section in the variable production. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of decorative symbols in the game state and each effect section.

The decorative pattern 55 includes, for example, patterns for performance represented by numbers from "1" to "9". In FIG. 17, as an example of the decorative pattern 55, a "1" pattern that is an odd number pattern and a "4" pattern that is an even number pattern are shown. As shown in FIG. 17, the decorative pattern 55 includes a character mode, which includes a number image 552 and a character image 551 corresponding to the number, and a character mode, which includes the number image 552 and does not include the character image 551. There is The number indicated by the decorative pattern 55 and the character image included in the decorative pattern 55 are in one-to-one correspondence. For example, a "1" symbol corresponds to the first character, and a "4" symbol corresponds to the fourth character.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the case of the normal game state, the size is "medium" (normal) before reach (the interval from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol until the reach is established), and the decoration in the mode with characters. A pattern 55 is displayed. In addition, during the N-reach performance after the establishment of the ready-to-win, the decoration pattern 55 of the size "medium" and in the mode with character is displayed. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol ends without reaching the ready-to-win, the mode of the decorative symbol 55 is the size "medium" and the mode with characters from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop of the variation. is.

Moreover, although it will be specifically described later, there are cases where the SP reach effect is performed after the N reach effect is performed. During this SP ready-to-win production, the mode of the left and right decorative patterns 55 changes to a mode of "small" size and no character. It should be noted that there may be a case where the SP ready-to-win effect is performed without performing the N ready-to-win effect from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加In this case as well, the mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SP ready-to-win effect is the "small" size and the non-character mode.

In addition, there is a case where the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed after the SP ready-to-win effect is performed. The mode of the left and right decorative patterns 55 during this SPSP ready-to-win effect is a "small" size and a mode without characters. In addition, after the N reach effect is performed, the SP SP reach effect may be performed without performing the SP reach effect. Moreover, there may be a case where the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed without performing the N-reach effect and the SP ready-to-win effect from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加Also in this case, the mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP ready-to-win effect is the "small" size and the non-character mode.

Then, after the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the winning/losing notification (hitting notification or losing notification) is performed. The mode of the decorative pattern 55 changes during the winning notification. Although the details will be described later, during a predetermined period during the winning notification (for example, during the first light emitting effect described later), the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "large" size and without characters. In addition, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and in a mode without characters (or in a mode with characters) except for the predetermined period during which the win is being announced. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and in a mode with characters. During the notification of failure, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and in a mode with characters.

It should be noted that there is also a case where the win-lose notification (hit notification or loss notification) is performed from the SP reach effect. Also when the winning notification is performed from the SP ready-to-win effect, there is a case where the mode of the decorative pattern 55 changes during the winning notification, as in the case of the winning-lost notification from the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable probability gaming state, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and without characters before reach. Although details will be described later, in the case of the variable probability gaming state, when the reach is established, the battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not the variable probability game state will continue in the variable probability game state, or whether or not the variable probability game state will occur in the time-saving game state, and the ally character and the enemy character fight. It is a performance. In the battle performance in the variable probability game state or the reduced working time game state, when a victory performance in which the ally character wins is performed, a big win game is performed, and after the big win game, the game state is shifted to the variable probability game state. On the other hand, if a defeat effect is performed in which the ally character is defeated in the battle effect in the variable probability game state (or the time saving game state), a big win game is performed, and after the big win game, the state shifts to the time saving game state (or the time saving game state continues. do). As a result of the battle effect, a draw effect may be performed in which the ally character and the enemy character draw each other. The draw effect is an effect indicating that the result of the special game determination is a loss, and is an effect indicating that the current game state continues.

During the battle production, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "small" size and without characters. The mode of the decorative pattern 55 may change during the winning performance after the battle performance. Specifically, during a predetermined period of the victory effect after the battle effect (for example, during the first light emission effect to be described later), the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "large" size and in a non-character mode. In addition, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the "medium" size and without characters except for the predetermined period of the victory effect. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and without characters. During the defeat performance and the draw performance after the battle performance, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and in a non-character mode.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 19, the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal game state will be described.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state. FIG. 19(a) is a table used when the result of special symbol determination is a big win, and is a normal big win variation pattern table used for selecting a big win variation pattern. FIG. 19(b) is a normal time reach fluctuation pattern table used to select a reach fluctuation pattern, and when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach random number is used to change the fluctuation time over a predetermined time. Used when determined to be selected. FIG. 19(c) is a normal time loss variation pattern table used to select a loss variation pattern, and when the result of special symbol determination is loss, a reach random number is used to determine a variation time of a predetermined time or more. Used when it is determined not to select.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes jackpot fluctuation patterns OP1 (variation time 30 seconds), OP2 (variation time 60 seconds), OP3 (variation time 80 seconds), and OP4 ( variation time 120 seconds). When the variation pattern is selected based on the jackpot variation pattern table, the jackpot variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 0.5%, the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 4.5%, and the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected. It is selected at a rate of 20%, and the big hit variation pattern OP4 is selected at a rate of 75%.

When the big hit variation pattern OP1 is selected, the variation performance including the normal reach performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the ready-to-win performance. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP1 is selected, three decorative patterns start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, and then the same kind of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides to perform the N-reach production. .

In addition, before the N-reach production is started (or after the start), a pseudo-variation production (pseudo-continuation) may be performed according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance as variation patterns for performing variation performances including N-reach performances and pseudo-variation performances. Here, the pseudo-run is an effect in which at least one of the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 temporarily stops and changes again. Temporary stop is a state in which the decorative pattern 55 is not completely stopped and slightly fluctuates (for example, swings up and down). A case where the decorative pattern 55 does not change again is sometimes referred to as "no pseudo". Further, when the decorative pattern 55 re-changes once or more, the first re-change may be referred to as "pseudo 2", and the second re-change may be referred to as "pseudo 3". The greater the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the reliability of winning later. For example, one or a plurality of times of pseudo-fluctuation effect (re-fluctuation) may be performed before the ready-to-win is established (the same kind of decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped on the left and right), and then the N-reach effect may be started. Alternatively, the ready-to-win state may be established without performing the pseudo-variation effect, and then the pseudo-variable effect may be performed one or more times, and the ready-to-win state may be established again to start the N-reach effect. In addition, before the ready-to-win is established, the pseudo-variation production is performed one or more times, the ready-to-win is established after that, the pseudo-variation production is performed one or more times, the ready-to-win is established again, and the ready-to-win production is performed. may be performed. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuation may be performed without any of the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stopping on the liquid crystal screen 5 . In this case, an image suggesting a pseudo-run temporarily stops on the liquid crystal screen 5 while the three decorative patterns 55 are changing, and the pseudo-run is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the big hit variation pattern OP2 is selected, the effect control section 130 performs a variable effect including an SP ready-to-win effect as the ready-to-win effect. Specifically, when the big win variation pattern OP2 is selected, the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, and then the SP reach performance is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which the variable performance including the SP ready-to-win effect is performed may be prepared, and the pseudo-variable effect may be performed one or more times in the variable effect including the SP ready-to-win effect.

Moreover, when the big hit variation pattern OP3 is selected, the variation performance including the special performance is performed by the performance control unit 130. - 特許庁Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed, and furthermore. After that, a special performance will be performed. The special effect is a effect that makes the player expect that a special pattern indicating a big win will stop on the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加The details of the special effect will be described later. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which variable performance including special performance is performed may be prepared, and pseudo-variable performance may be performed one or more times in the variable performance including special performance.

Further, when the big hit variation pattern OP4 is selected, the variation performance including the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the ready-to-win performance. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, and then the SP reach performance is performed, and furthermore. After that, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which the variable performance including the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed may be prepared, and the pseudo-variable effect may be performed one or more times in the variable effect including the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns RP1 (variation time 27 seconds), RP2 (variation time 57 seconds), RP3 (variation time 75 seconds), RP4 (fluctuation time 113 seconds). When the variation patterns are selected based on the reach variation pattern table, the reach variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 50%, the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 15%. , and the reach variation pattern RP4 is selected at a rate of 10%.

When the ready-to-reach variation pattern RP1 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variable effect including an N-reach effect as a ready-to-win effect. When the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including the SP reach effect as the reach effect. When the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variable effect including a special effect. When the reach variation pattern RP4 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including the SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19(c), when a variation pattern is selected based on the loss variation pattern table, when the value of the number of reservations U1 is "2" or less, the loss variation pattern HP1 (variation time 8 second) is selected with a probability of 80%, and the losing variation pattern HP2 (variation time of 12 seconds) is selected with a probability of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern is selected based on the loss variation pattern table, when the value of the number of reservations U1 is "3", the loss variation pattern HP3 (variation time 3 seconds) is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when it is determined as a big hit, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is likely to be performed, and the N-reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined that the game is lost, it is difficult to perform the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and it is easy to perform the N-reach effect. Therefore, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed, the possibility of winning the jackpot is relatively high after that, and when the N-reach performance is performed, the possibility of winning the big win is relatively low after that, and the big win is achieved. , the reliability increases in the order of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SP SP reach effect.

Moreover, as a big hit variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern that does not include a ready-to-win effect. When such a variation pattern is selected, no ready-to-win performance is performed, and a hit performance is performed in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned and a big hit is reported. In addition, in the variable production in which the hit production is performed, the reach is established and the N reach production is performed, and the screen is suddenly switched and the three decorative patterns 55 are aligned. A jackpot may be reported by the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the variation pattern of the special symbols in the variable probability gaming state will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 20(a) is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is a probability variable jackpot variation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern. FIG. 20(b) is a probability variable time reach variation pattern table used when it is determined to select a variation time longer than a predetermined time using reach random numbers when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. FIG. 20(c) is a table used when it is determined not to select a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time using reach random numbers when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the probability variable gaming state is determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol determination, and when the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. Also, when the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state, and when the big winning symbol Z3 is selected, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state, and when the big hit symbol Z4 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. Further, when the jackpot pattern Z5 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit in the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state, and when the big winning symbol Z6 is selected, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected.

When the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a victory effect. In addition, when the variation pattern OP5-1 is selected, it is reported that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot that is more advantageous for the player in the winning effect, and the winning effect executed when the variation pattern OP5-2 is selected. There are also flashy performances. Also, when the variation pattern OP6 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a defeat effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(b), the reach variation pattern table used in the variable probability gaming state includes the reach variation pattern RP5 (variation time 50 seconds). When the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a draw effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(c), the loss variation pattern table used in the variable probability gaming state includes a loss variation pattern HP4-1 (variation time 15 seconds), and loss variation patterns HP4-2 (variation time 2 seconds) and HP4-3 (variation time 15 seconds) selected based on the winning to the second starting port 12 are included. The losing variation pattern HP4-2 is selected when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, and the losing variation pattern HP4-3 is selected when the number of reservations U2 is "0".

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state, as the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the same variation pattern table as in the probability variation gaming state may be used, or a variation pattern table different from the probability variation gaming state is used. may be

(Production during winning announcement)
Next, the effect during the winning notification in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal screen 5 is illuminated with a decorative pattern. The light emission effect in the present embodiment is a effect of displaying on the liquid crystal screen 5 an effect image (an image representing light emission, thunder, sparks, etc.) in which the decorative pattern appears to shine. Note that the effect image representing light may be an effect display in which light is emitted or may be an effect display in which light is absorbed as long as it is an image used to enhance the visual effect. The light emitting effect performed during the winning notification is called a winning light emitting effect. The hit light emitting effect will be described below. First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the winning notification performed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the normal game state will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the flow of variable effects including SPSP ready-to-win effects. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the details of the winning notification performed as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the SPSP ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. FIG. 24 is an effect following FIG. 23, showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a winning notification is performed. As described above, the variable effect including the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed when the variable pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected.

FIG. 23(A) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is finished. In FIG. 23(A), three decoration patterns 55 are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 . Also, in FIG. 23A, a normal background image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the three decorative designs 55 are each of a "medium" size and in the mode with characters. In addition, in the lower area of the liquid crystal screen 5, a plurality of reserved icons 51 indicating the reserved right of the first special symbol determination are displayed. A maximum of four pending icons 51 are displayed. The pending icon 51 is basically displayed in white, and if the reliability is relatively high, it is displayed in colors other than white (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow colors) that indicate the degree of reliability. It is displayed (it may be displayed from the beginning or may be changed in the middle). The color of the pending icon 51 is determined by a random number lottery based on the result of prior determination by the effect control unit 130. - 特許庁

In addition, a changing icon 53 indicating the current change of the first special symbol is displayed in the lower central area of the screen. In this embodiment, the earliest pending icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53 . Therefore, the color of the changing icon 53 is basically the same as that of the pending icon 51 . Note that the changing icon 53 may change to a color (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow colors) that indicates the level of reliability of the pending icon 51 or higher. The color of the changing icon 53 is determined by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the performance control unit 130. - 特許庁

Also, a small pattern 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. The small design 56 includes three number designs, fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the special design, and stops according to the stop of the special design. The small pattern 56 is displayed while the decorative pattern 55 is hidden during the fluctuation of the special pattern (for example, while the cut-in image is displayed on the entire screen, when the SPSP reach develops, or when the predetermined high reliability is reached). It is displayed even while the screen is switched when the production starts). In this embodiment, the small pattern 56 is not added with a color that indicates the degree of reliability.

A fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the right end of the screen. The fourth pattern 57 is a pattern for effect that changes and stops according to the change and stop of the first special pattern, and is always displayed on the screen while the first special pattern is changing. A fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed. The fourth pattern 59 is a pattern for effect that changes and stops according to the change and stop of the second special pattern, and is always displayed on the screen while the second special pattern is changing. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 notify the result of the special symbol determination by the stopped color. Note that the variation of the fourth symbols 57 and 59 is, for example, that images of colors (eg, red, blue, and yellow) for notifying the result of special symbol determination are repeated in order for a certain period of time (eg, 0.2 seconds). This is realized by displaying the data one by one. In this embodiment, the colors of the fourth symbols 57 and 59 that are changing do not suggest the degree of reliability. In addition, the fourth patterns 57 and 59 are not added with a color indicating the degree of reliability. The fourth patterns 57 and 59 may be displayed using other display means (for example, LEDs) provided around the liquid crystal screen 5, for example.

In addition, a pending number 52 indicating the number of pending first special symbol determination and second special symbol determination is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The reserved number 52 includes a number on the left indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination, and a number on the right side indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination. It should be noted that this reserved number 52 is always displayed on the screen while the special symbols are changing. In the present embodiment, the reserved number 52 does not indicate the degree of reliability, and the reserved number 52 is not added with a color indicating the degree of reliability.

The reserved icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small pattern 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth patterns 57 and 59 are displayed in different places. Since these images are always displayed in front of other images, they are not obscured by other images. Specifically, for example, even when an effect image (effect images 61 and 62 to be described later) relating to the winning light emitting effect is displayed, the effect The small pattern 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth patterns 57 and 59 do not become invisible and the visibility thereof is not deteriorated without being overlaid with an image. The same applies when the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are displayed during the winning light effect. Further, even when effect images relating to the ready-to-reach lighting effect, the non-reach light-emitting effect, and the chance eye lighting effect to be described later are displayed, the pending icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small pattern 56, the pending number 52, and the fourth pattern are displayed. The effect image is not applied to 57 and 59, and the small pattern 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth patterns 57 and 59 do not become invisible and their visibility is not lowered.

In this embodiment, the sizes of the decorative pattern 55, the changing icon 53, the reserved icon 51, the small pattern 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth patterns 57 and 59 are smaller in this order. Note that the changing icon 53 and the pending icon 51 may have the same size. Also, the small pattern 56 may be larger than the pending icon 51 (or the changing icon 53), or may be the same size as the pending icon 51 (or the changing icon 53). The reserved number 52 and the fourth patterns 57 and 59 may be of the same size, or the reserved number 52 may be smaller than the fourth patterns 57 and 59 .

When the first special symbol determination is performed in the game control unit 100 and the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 41. Along with this, a variation start command including the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130 . In response to receiving this variation start command, the effect control section 130 starts varying the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(B)). Also, on the liquid crystal screen 5 , the plurality of pending icons 51 are moved to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53 . Also, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number 52 decreases in accordance with the reception of the variable start command.

During the period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 55 to establishment of the ready-to-win state (between t0 and t1 in FIG. 21 and between (B) to (C) in FIG. 23), a pre-ready-to-win effect is performed. In the ready-to-win performance, three decorative patterns 55 (the decorative patterns 55 of "medium" size and in the mode with characters) that have been stopped and displayed start to fluctuate in response to receiving the command to start the fluctuation. The state is displayed. After the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate, the three decorative patterns 55 fluctuate at high speed in the same manner as when the fluctuation started (that is, the size is "medium" and there is a character). In addition, in the ready-to-win production, an advance notice production that suggests the possibility of a big win (an advance notice image display and an effect of moving the movable accessory 7) is performed, and a pseudo-variation production that simulates the variation of the decorative pattern 55 is performed. be broken.

When a predetermined time elapses after the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 55 of the same type on the left and right temporarily stop to establish reach (t1 in FIG. 21, (C) in FIG. 23). For example, before reach is established, the left decorative pattern 55 among the three decorative patterns 55 moves slowly from the top of the screen and temporarily stops in the area on the left side of the screen. Move slowly and pause in the area on the right side of the screen. Then, a voice indicating reach establishment is output, and an image indicating reach establishment is displayed. At this time, the small pattern 56 is not displayed in the ready-to-win state, but is displayed in a state in which the three small patterns are changed. Incidentally, when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the small pattern 56 may also be displayed in the ready-to-win mode.

In the following, the outline of the ready-to-win effect will be described, but the details of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win effect is established will be described later.

When the ready-to-win state is established, the N-reach effect is performed (t1 to t2 in FIG. 21, (D) in FIG. 23). During the N-reach production, the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area is displayed to move from the top to the bottom of the screen in a state where the size is "medium" in the left and right direction and the decoration pattern 55 in the mode with the character is temporarily stopped. (FIGS. 23(D) and (E)). As a result, the player expects that the decorative patterns 55 of the same kind as the left and right will stop in the middle area. Also, during the N-reach effect, a normal background image is displayed.

After the N-reach effect, an SP-development effect suggesting development to an SP-reach effect is performed (t2 in FIG. 21, (F) in FIG. 23). For example, at the end of the N-reach production, an effect is produced as if the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region moves slowly and stops in the middle region, and the speed of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region increases (see FIG. 21). At t2), the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area fluctuates at high speed again, thereby performing the SP development effect. When the SP development effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 23(F), for example, the left and right decorative patterns 55 move left and right on the upper part of the screen while shrinking. At this time, the character images added to the left and right decorative patterns 55 are separated, and the mode changes to a mode without characters. That is, in the SP development effect, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are changed from the "medium" size and character mode to the "small" size and no character mode.

After the SP development effect is performed, the SP ready-to-win effect is started (t3 in FIG. 21, (G) in FIG. 23). During the SP ready-to-win performance, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are "small" in size and temporarily stop on the left and right sides of the screen in a mode without characters, and a moving image performance corresponding to the SP ready-to-win performance is performed in the center of the screen. . Also, during the SP ready-to-win effect, an SP background image for the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed. During the SP ready-to-win performance, a performance is performed to make the player expect a big win. For example, in the SP reach effect, an effect is displayed in which a 2D animation character performs a predetermined action. Further, as shown in FIG. 23G, after the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are hidden. During the SP ready-to-win effect, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed, or only the pending icon 51 may be hidden and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed.

When the SP ready-to-win effect ends, an SPSP developing effect to suggest the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed (t4 in FIG. 21, (H) in FIG. 23). For example, in the SPSP development effect, a title relating to the SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed may be displayed. The display mode of this title may suggest the degree of reliability of the jackpot.

After the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started (t5 in FIG. 21, (I) in FIG. 23). For example, during the SPSP ready-to-win production, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are displayed in a "small" size and temporarily stopped on the left and right sides of the screen in a non-character mode, and in the center of the screen, the player is awarded a big win. The expected 3D animation is displayed. During the SPSP ready-to-win production, an SPSP background image for the SPSP ready-to-win production is displayed. The pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed during the SP ready-to-win production, or the holding icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be hidden according to the start of the SP ready-to-win production. Alternatively, only the pending icon 51 may be hidden.

When the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed for a predetermined period of time, as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a win/lose notification for notifying whether or not a big win is made is performed (t7 in FIG. 21). Specifically, at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and immediately before the winning/losing notification, a final effect is performed (t6 in FIGS. 21 and 22, FIG. 24(J)). For example, in the decision effect, as shown in FIG. 24(J), an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 . The operation prompting effect includes an operation prompting image 65 and a validity period image 651 indicating the validity period of the operation on the effect button 26 . Then, in response to the fact that the effect button 26 has been operated, or in response to the elapse of the effective time of the operation, when it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination (that is, the variation pattern OP4 is selected case), as the winning/losing notification, a winning notification for notifying a jackpot is performed (t7 in FIG. 22). In addition, in the decision effect, the operation promotion effect may not be performed. When the operation promoting effect is performed in the deciding effect, the reliability of winning a big win may be higher than when the operation promoting effect is not performed. When the operation prompting effect is not performed, regardless of whether the effect button 26 is operated or not, the winning/losing notification is performed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the deciding effect.

In the winning notification, a big winning is announced by a pattern matching effect in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned (t7 to t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(K)). In the pattern-matching performance, decorative patterns 55 of the same kind as the left and right are temporarily stopped in the middle area of the screen. The three decorative patterns 55 when the pattern-matching effect is performed are in the non-character mode. As shown in FIG. 24(K), when the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, the decorative pattern 55 larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region is emphasized. Image 60 is displayed. For example, the effect image 60 is an image displayed around the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region, is an image in which the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region emits light, and is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region. be. Also, as shown in FIG. 24(K), even when three decorative patterns 55 of the same kind are arranged, the three small patterns 56 are fluctuating at high speed. Incidentally, the small pattern 56 may be temporarily stopped in the form of a big win ("333") at the timing when the win notification shown in FIG. 24(K) is performed. In this case, the three small patterns 56 swing in the same manner as the decorative patterns 55 after the timing of the winning notification shown in FIG. 24(K). (At the time of the stop display of the special pattern), the main stop may be performed.

Incidentally, at time t7 in FIG. 22, a jackpot may be notified by a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is activated, instead of the pattern matching effect. In the character object actuation effect, for example, the movable character object 7 appears in front of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the screen is almost entirely covered with the movable character object 7 . As a result, the player is notified of the big win. When a big hit is announced by a character actuation effect in place of the pattern matching effect, the left and right decorative patterns 55 may be hidden during the SPSP ready-to-win effect (FIGS. 23(H) to 24(J)). . In this case, although the small pattern 56 is displayed, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are not displayed, and even if a moving image effect for the SPSP reach effect (for example, a effect in which a friend character attacks an enemy character) is displayed. good. Further, when the left and right decorative patterns 55 are hidden during the SPSP ready-to-win production, the small patterns 56 may also be hidden. Then, in the deciding effect (FIG. 24(J)) at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, for example, an effect is performed to agitate whether or not the attack of the ally character will succeed, and at time t7 in FIG. will be

In addition, the pattern-matching effect may be performed immediately after the role product operation effect is performed, or the symbol-matching effect may be performed immediately after the symbol-matching effect is performed.

After the symbol-matching effect (or/and the role-thing effect), the first light-emitting effect, which is a type of winning light-emitting effect, is performed (t8 in FIG. 22, (L) in FIG. 24). The first light emitting effect is a effect performed for the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot manner, and is a effect for emphasizing the decorative pattern 55. - 特許庁Here, ``when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode'' means a case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode and a timing when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode. and a case immediately before the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot manner. That is, the first light emitting effect may be started in a state in which the decorative pattern 55 of the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) is displayed, or the jackpot mode decorative pattern 55 shown in FIG. The first light emission effect may be started at the timing when it is displayed. In addition, the first light emitting effect may be started immediately before the decorative pattern 55 of the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) is displayed. For example, in the first light emission effect, an effect image 61 (for example, a white image) brighter than the decorative design 55 itself is placed around each of the three decorative designs 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative designs 55 emit light in a common luminescent color. It may be an effect to be displayed. The effect image 61 is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55. FIG. The effect image 61 in the first light emission effect may be an image different from the effect image 60 in the pattern matching effect, or may be the same image. Also, the first light emitting effect may be a effect in which the decorative pattern 55 itself emits light. Note that the rainbow-colored effect image 61 suggesting a big win may be displayed by the first light emission effect.

In addition, in the first light emission effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are displayed in a "large" size and without characters. Specifically, it becomes larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55 during the SPSP ready-to-win production, the three decorative patterns 55 during the ready-to-win production, and the decorative patterns 55 in the middle region when the patterns shown in FIG. 24(K) are aligned. , the three decorative patterns 55 are enlarged and displayed, and the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area is displayed larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55.例文帳に追加In the first light emitting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are displayed to be enlarged so as to move from the back of the screen to the front. After the three decorative patterns 55 are enlarged to the maximum, the three decorative patterns 55 are reduced so as to move from the front to the back of the screen. In addition, a first hit light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24 along with the first light emission effect. In this embodiment, the display time of the effect image 60 relating to the first light-emitting effect and the output time of the first hit light-emitting effect sound are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship. For example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Also, during the first light emission effect, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Incidentally, during the execution of the first light emitting effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot manner. For example, the three small symbols 56 may temporarily stop in a jackpot manner at the timing when the first light emitting effect is started. In addition, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode before the first light emission effect is started (for example, time t7), and the temporary stop state may be continued during the first light emission effect. Further, the small pattern 56 may be hidden during the first light emission effect.

The first light emission effect is performed by reproducing a pre-stored moving image. Specifically, a moving image of the decorative pattern for the first light emission effect (a moving image in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image sound control unit 140, and by reproducing the moving image, the first A lighting effect is performed. Note that the decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 61 are stored in advance in the image sound control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image sound control unit 140 displays the effect image 61 around the decorative pattern 55, so that the first light emission is performed. A performance may be performed.

Then, when the first light emitting effect ends (when the effect image 61 is hidden), as shown in FIG. 22 t9). In this state, the three decorative patterns 55 do not stop completely, but swing on the screen. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be in a mode without characters or in a mode with characters. For example, the three decorative designs 55 in the non-character mode shown in FIG. 24(L) may be reduced, and the three decorative designs 55 in the non-character mode may swing in FIG. 24(M). Alternatively, after the three decorative patterns 55 without characters are displayed in FIG. The three decorative designs 55 of the aspect may swing. When switching to a normal background image in FIG. 24(M), the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be displayed again.

After a predetermined swing period has elapsed, a second light emission effect, which is a kind of winning light effect, is performed next (t10 in FIG. 22, (N) in FIG. 24). The second light emitting effect is a effect performed for the decorative pattern 55 in a state that the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode, and is a production that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加The second light emitting effect is a effect in which each of the three decorative patterns 55 emit light in a common light emitting color, and is different from the first light emitting effect. For example, in the second light emission effect, each of the three decorative patterns 55 may be added with an effect image 62 (for example, a white image) that is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself. Further, in the second light emitting effect, a moving image effect may be used in which a part of the decorative pattern 55 emits light and the light emitting part moves from top to bottom. The decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 62 are stored in advance in the image sound control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image sound control unit 140 draws the effect image 62 on a layer in front of or behind the decorative pattern 55. , the second light emission effect may be performed. Alternatively, a moving image of the decorative pattern for the second light emitting effect (a moving image in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image/sound control unit 140, and the three decorative patterns 55 are displayed by reproducing the moving image. may be performed. Note that the rainbow-colored effect image 62 suggesting a big win may be displayed by the second light emission effect.

In addition, in the second light emitting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 may be displayed in a "medium" size and in a mode with characters, or may be displayed in a "medium" size and in a mode without characters. may The three decorative patterns 55 remain swinging even during the second light emitting effect. Further, along with the second light emission effect, the speaker 24 outputs a second hit light emission effect sound different from the first hit light effect sound. The second winning light effect sound may be the same effect sound as the first winning light effect sound. In the present embodiment, the display time of the effect image 62 relating to the second lighting effect and the output time of the second hit lighting effect sound are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship. For example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Also, during execution of the second light emission effect, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. During the execution of the second light emitting effect, the three small patterns 56 may be temporarily stopped in the same manner as the decorative patterns 55 in the form of a big win. For example, the three small symbols 56 may temporarily stop in a jackpot mode at the timing when the second light emission effect is started. In addition, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode before the second light emission effect is started (for example, time t7), and the temporary stop state may be continued during the second light emission effect. Further, the small pattern 56 may be hidden during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emitting effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 24(O), the three decorative patterns 55 swing in the mode of "medium" size (t11 in FIG. 22). At this time, the modes of the three decorative patterns 55 are the same as those at the time of the second light emitting effect. Then, when a predetermined swing period elapses, the special symbols are stopped by the game control unit 100, and a fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the performance control unit 130, and the three decorative symbols 55 are actually stopped, and the three small symbols are displayed. 56 is also fully stopped (t12 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(P)). Here, the final stop means that the three decorative patterns 55 are completely stopped. In addition, according to this fluctuation stop command, the fourth pattern 57 also stops fluctuating and is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130, In response to receiving the opening command, the effect control unit 130 starts the opening effect (t13 in FIG. 22, (Q) in FIG. 24). Then, when the opening period elapses, a jackpot game for opening the jackpot 13 is started. In response to the start of the jackpot game, a round start command of the first round is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the performance control unit 130, and the performance control unit 130 starts the jackpot performance in response to the round start command. .

Thus, during the winning notification, the winning light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect and second light-emitting effect) for the decorative pattern 55 is performed.

When the hit notification is performed, in addition to the image effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a light effect (lamp light effect) is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a manner suggesting a big win. will be The lamp lighting effect using the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 is performed for a predetermined period from the winning notification at time t7. For example, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors. For example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a rainbow-colored light emission pattern). The details of the lamp lighting effect during the hit notification will be described later.

In addition, when the result of the special design determination is a loss, the failure is reported after FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the details of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 26 is an effect following FIG. 23, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a failure notification is given.

As shown in FIG. 25, at time t7, a misalignment notification is given by means of a pattern irregularity effect in which the three decorative patterns 55 are not aligned. In the pattern irregularity effect, the decorative patterns 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped in the middle area, resulting in a reach-losing pattern (FIG. 26 (K-2)). At this time, the effect image 60 attached to the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area shown in FIG. 24(K) is not displayed. In addition, when the reach losing eye is displayed, an effect image different from or the same as the effect image 60 may be displayed in the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. Moreover, even when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, the three small patterns 56 are continuing the high-speed fluctuation. It should be noted that the small pattern 56 may be temporarily stopped in the lost mode ("343") at the timing when the lost notification shown in FIG. 26 (K-2) is performed. After the design irregularity effect is performed, the background is switched to a normal background image, and the three decorative patterns 55 (ready-to-be-losing) temporarily stop and swing in the center of the screen (t8-2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (L-2)). At the timing when the screen is switched to the normal background, the three decorative patterns 55 are "medium" in size, and the mode returns to the mode with characters. At this time, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are also displayed again. Also at time 8-2, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

Then, when a predetermined swing period elapses, a variation stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130, and in response to receiving the variation stop command, the three decorative symbols 55 are fully stopped. , the three small patterns 56 are also fully stopped (t8-3 in FIG. 25, (M-2) in FIG. 26). Furthermore, when the right of special symbol determination is reserved, the special symbol determination related to the right is performed, and a variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130 . In response to this variation start command, the three decorative symbols 55 that have been officially stopped start to vary (FIG. 26 (N-2)).

The swing period (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) in the losing notification may be shorter or longer than the swing period (period from time t9 to t10) after the first light emission effect in the winning notification. may

In addition, during the swinging period of the loss notification, a resurrection stimulating effect may be performed to make the player expect a resurrection effect. The resurrection effect is a effect in which a big hit is notified after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped (temporarily lost) in a losing mode after the determined effect. When it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination, after the resurrection inciting performance, the revival performance is performed and the big win may be reported. For example, a role product actuation effect may be performed as the resurrection effect. Further, when it is determined to be a loss in the special symbol determination, the resurrection effect is not performed after the resurrection stimulating effect, and the variable effect ends. When the resurrection fan effect or the resurrection effect is performed, the swing period (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) is the swing period after the first light emission effect in the winning notification (from time t9 to t10). period).

(Re-lottery effect during winning notification)
A re-lottery effect may be performed during the winning notification shown in FIGS. The re-lottery performance is a performance indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not the types of the three decorative symbols 55 will be changed. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of the jackpot is suggested by the type of the decorative pattern 55 when the three decorative patterns 55 are arranged. For example, the "7" symbol is a symbol indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot for the player, the odd number symbol is a symbol indicating a probability variable jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot or 4R probability variable jackpot), and the even number symbols are , 4R is a symbol suggesting the possibility of a normal jackpot. Therefore, the re-lottery effect is a effect that makes the player expect whether or not there will be an advantageous big win.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification.

As shown in FIG. 27, after the ending effect of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a big hit is reported by the design matching effect and/or the character actuation effect, and then the first light emitting effect is performed at time T8-1. (Fig. 28(A)). After the first light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 are aligned and swayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 28(B)), and at time T8-2, a re-lottery effect is performed (FIG. 28(C) )).

In the re-lottery effect, for example, a plurality of symbol rows (for example, a symbol row of "333" and a symbol row of "444") in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same kind are aligned in the horizontal direction are displayed, and the plurality of symbol rows are displayed on the screen. is displayed as it moves from above to below. The three small patterns 56 are fluctuating at high speed even during this re-lottery effect. Then, after the re-lottery effect is performed for a predetermined time, at time T8-3, as a result of the re-lottery effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped, and the first light emitting effect is performed (FIG. 28 ( D)). The second first light emission effect (FIG. 28(D)) performed at time T8-3 and the first light emission effect (FIG. 28(A)) performed at time T8-1 are the same effect. , or may be a different production. In addition, the three small patterns 56 are fluctuating at high speed even during the second first light emitting effect. It should be noted that during the second first light emitting effect, the three small patterns 56 may temporarily stop in the same jackpot mode as the three decorative patterns 55 . For example, the three small patterns 56 may temporarily stop at the timing when the second first light emitting effect is started or after the start. Also, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second first light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained during the second first light emission effect.

For example, when the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the second first light emitting effect is different from the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the first light emitting effect of the first time, the second first light emitting effect and 1 The effect mode may be different from the first light emission effect of the first time. At the time of the first light emission effect of the first time, an even number design that suggests a 4R normal jackpot is displayed, and at the time of the second light emission effect, an odd number design that suggests a 4R probability variable jackpot (odd number design other than the “7” design) and a 10R probability variation jackpot. When the "7" symbol suggesting is displayed, the first light emitting effect of the first time and the first light emitting effect of the second time may be different effect modes. Specifically, in this case, the second first light emission effect may be more flashy than the first first light emission effect. In the second first light emission production, when the "7" pattern suggesting the 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed than when the odd number pattern suggesting the 4R probability variation jackpot is displayed, a flashy production is performed. may That is, when the re-lottery effect increases the ranking (informs the player of the fact that the jackpot is more advantageous), the first light emitting effect before the ranking performed at time T8-1 and the time T8-3. A different effect may be performed with the first light emitting effect after being upgraded. For example, in the first light emission effect before the upgrade, the white effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55, while in the first light emission effect after the upgrade, the rainbow color effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55. may be displayed. Also, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed larger in the first light emission effect after the upgrade than in the first light emission effect before the upgrade.

On the other hand, when the even-numbered symbols suggesting a 4R normal jackpot are displayed during the first light-emitting effect of the first time, and the same even-numbered symbols are displayed during the second light-emitting effect of the second time, the first light-emitting effect of the first time and the 2 The first light emitting effect for the first time may be the same effect mode. Alternatively, in this case, the second first light emission effect may be a plainer effect than the first first light emission effect. For example, in the first light emission effect, a relatively large decorative pattern 55 is displayed and a relatively bright color effect image 61 is displayed, and in the second first light emission effect, a relatively small decorative pattern 55 is displayed. The effect image 61 with a relatively dark color may also be displayed.

After the second first light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 sway together in the center of the screen (t9 in FIG. 27, (E) in FIG. 28). Then, the second light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28(F)). From FIG. 28(F) onwards, the same effect as that from FIG. 24(N) onwards is performed.

In this way, the first light emission effect may be performed twice during the winning notification. Even in this case, the second light emission effect is performed only once.

(Hit notification by stopping special symbols)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, special symbols are prepared in addition to the decorative symbols 55 represented by numbers such as "1" to "9" symbols. Below, the hit notification by stopping the special symbol will be described.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable effects including special effects. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the winning notification performed as a result of the special effect. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including a special effect is performed. As described above, the variable effect including the special effect is executed when the variable pattern OP3 or RP3 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 29, similarly to FIG. 21, after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, each effect is performed in the order of reach-before effect and N-reach effect (t0 to t2 in FIG. 29), and SP reach effect at time t3. is started (FIG. 31(A)). FIG. 31(A) is an image similar to FIG. 23(G).

After the SP ready-to-win effect is started, instead of performing the SPSP development effect, a temporary loss is notified by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 in the center of the screen (T4 in FIG. 29). -1, FIG. 31(B)). After that, a special development inciting effect is performed to make the player expect whether or not the game will develop into a special effect (T5-1 in FIG. 29). After the special development fanning effect, the special effect is started (T5-2 in FIG. 29, FIG. 31(C)). In the special effect, special symbols are variably displayed, and an effect is performed to make the player expect that the special symbols will stop (FIG. 31(D)). Alternatively, in the special effect, an effect may be performed in which the player expects that the special symbol changes from an obscure state to a clear state. Here, the special pattern is an image that does not include a number pattern, and is a pattern consisting of images of letters, characters, etc. For example, it is a pattern suggesting the possibility of both a 4R probability variable jackpot and a 4R normal jackpot. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the special effect, a win-lose notification is made (T7-1 in FIG. 29). It should be noted that the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even when the provisional loss is notified at T4-1. Also, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during execution of the special effect.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, a winning notification is performed as a winning notification (T7-1 in FIG. 30). Specifically, at time T7-1, the special symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 31(E)). Alternatively, as a winning notification, the special pattern may change to a clear state. As a result, the player is notified of the big win. Even when this special symbol temporarily stops, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Incidentally, when the special symbols are stopped, the three small symbols 56 may also be temporarily stopped. In this case, a small pattern (special small pattern) corresponding to the special pattern displayed large in the center of the screen may temporarily stop in the lower left area of the screen.

When the special symbol is displayed, the first light emission effect is performed (T7-2 in FIG. 30, (F) in FIG. 31). For example, after the special symbols are temporarily stopped, or at the timing when the special symbols are temporarily stopped, the first light emitting effect is performed. The first light emitting effect that is performed here is a effect that is performed with respect to the special pattern, and is a effect that emphasizes the special pattern. For example, the first light emitting effect for the special pattern is the effect of displaying an effect image 63 (for example, a white image) around the special pattern that is brighter than the special pattern itself so that the area around the special pattern emits light in a predetermined luminescent color. may be The effect image 63 is an image different from the effect image 61 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 in FIG. 24(L). Also, during the first light emitting effect for the special symbols, the special symbols are enlarged and displayed. Note that the effect image 63 in the first light emission effect for the special symbols and the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect when the symbols are aligned (FIG. 24(L)) may be the same image. The three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the first light emission effect for the special pattern. It should be noted that the three small patterns 56 may temporarily stop during the first light emission effect. For example, the three small patterns 56 may temporarily stop at the timing when the first light emitting effect is started or after the start. Also, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the first light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained even during the first light emission effect.

When the first light emitting effect is completed, the special symbol temporarily stops at the center of the screen and swings (T7-3 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(G)). After a predetermined swing period has elapsed, the second light emission effect is performed next (T7-4 in FIG. 30, (H) in FIG. 31). The second light emitting effect is a effect performed for special symbols, and is a effect that emphasizes the special symbols. For example, the second light emitting effect for the special pattern is a effect in which the effect image 64 is added to the special pattern so that part of the special pattern emits light in a predetermined luminescent color. The effect image 64 may be the same image as the effect image 62 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 in FIG. 24(N), or may be a different image. The three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the second light emitting effect for the special pattern. It should be noted that the three small symbols 56 may temporarily stop during the second light emission effect. For example, the three small patterns 56 may temporarily stop at the timing when the second light emitting effect is started or after the start. Also, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emitting effect is completed, the special pattern swings in the center of the screen (T7-5 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31 (I)), and after that, the special pattern is actually stopped in response to the stop of the special pattern, and the small The pattern 56 is also fully stopped (T7-6 in FIG. 30).

It should be noted that when a big hit is reported by special symbols, the second light emitting effect does not have to be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, after the first light emission effect is performed at time T7-2, the special symbol swings at the center of the screen (FIG. 32(G)), and then the second light emission. The special symbols are permanently stopped in response to the stop of the special symbols without any performance, and the small symbols 56 are also permanently stopped as special small symbols corresponding to the special symbols (FIG. 32 (G-2)).

Also, although illustration is omitted, when a big win is notified by a special symbol, the first light emitting effect does not have to be performed. In this case, the first light emission effect may not be performed at time T7-2, and the second light emission effect may be performed at time T-4. Moreover, when a big hit is notified by a special symbol, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect do not have to be performed.

Incidentally, when the result of the special design determination is a loss, the special design does not stop (or the special design is not displayed in a clear state) in FIG. The decorative pattern indicating the failure is stopped without any performance.

(Hit notification in probability variable gaming state)
Next, the hit notification in the probability variation gaming state will be described. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, hit notification performed after the battle effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. In the probability variable gaming state, when it is determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination, reach is established in the variable performance, and a battle performance in which the characters fight each other is performed. In the probability variable gaming state, when it is determined that the 10R probability variable big hit or the 4R probability variable big hit is determined, a victory effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. On the other hand, when the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the probability variable gaming state, a battle effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, a defeat effect is performed. Also, in the probability variable gaming state, when the special symbol determination is determined to be a loss and the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the reach is established in the variation performance, and the battle performance is performed. In this case, a draw effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. Hereinafter, in the probability variation gaming state, the case where it is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot will be described.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable effect when it is determined that the game is a big hit in the probability variable gaming state. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. The variation effects shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 are executed when the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected.

FIG. 34(A) shows an example of the image at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished in the probability variable gaming state. As shown in FIG. 34(A), in the variable probability game state, as the decorative pattern 55, a decorative pattern different from that in the normal game state is displayed. In the variable probability game state, the decorative pattern 55 is of a "medium" size and has no character. Also, in the probability variation gaming state, the background image for probability variation is displayed as the background image. In addition, in the variable probability game state, characters and images are displayed on the screen to prompt the player to "hit right". A fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the right end of the screen. A fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is also displayed.

Also, in the lower area of the screen, a plurality of reserved icons 51 indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, and a changing icon 53 indicating the current change of the second special symbol are displayed. In addition, a pending number 52 indicating the number of pending first special symbol determination and second special symbol determination is displayed at the lower right of the screen. Also, a small pattern 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. Since the small symbols 56 are displayed in the same manner as in the normal game state, detailed description thereof will be omitted below. In addition, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the normal game state and may not be displayed in the variable probability game state.

When the second special symbol determination is performed in the game control unit 100, the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display device 42, and a variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. be done. In response to receiving this variation start command, the effect control section 130 starts varying the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(B)). Also, on the liquid crystal screen 5 , the plurality of pending icons 51 are moved to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53 . Also, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number 52 decreases in accordance with the reception of the variable start command. In the following figures, the display of the reserved number 52 is omitted for simplification of the figures.

For a predetermined period (t0 to t1) from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 55, a pre-reach production is performed. In the ready-to-reach effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are changed at high speed in the same mode ("medium" size and no characters) as at the start of the variation (FIG. 34(B)), and after a predetermined time has passed, the left area The decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped (FIG. 34(C)), and a ready-to-win effect is performed to determine whether or not the decorative pattern 55 of the same kind as the left region is temporarily stopped in the right area (FIG. 34(D)). When the decorative pattern 55 of the same kind as that in the left area is temporarily stopped in the right area as a result of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win is established (t1 in FIG. 33, (E) in FIG. 34). The details of the effect after the reach is established will be described later, but only the outline thereof will be described below.

When reach is established, for example, a battle start effect indicating that a battle effect between character A and character B is to start is performed (FIG. 34(F)), and the battle effect is started (t2 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(G)). The opponent's character (character B in the figure) in this battle production suggests the reliability of the probability variable jackpot. During the battle production, a moving image production in which character A and character B fight is performed on the screen. During the battle production, the decoration pattern 55 is displayed in the left and right sides of the screen, for example, in a "small" size and without characters. Note that the decorative pattern 55 may not be displayed during the battle production.

When the battle effect is performed for a predetermined time, a final effect is performed at the end of the battle effect (t3 in FIG. 33, (H) in FIG. 34). This decisive effect is a decisive effect that encourages whether or not character A will win against character B, and is a different effect from the decisive effect in the normal game state (see FIG. 24(J)). In the determination effect, as shown in FIG. 34(H), for example, an operation prompting effect (for example, display of an operation prompting image 65 and an effective period image 651) prompting the player to operate the effect button 26 may be performed. . This operation promotion effect may be the same effect as the operation promotion effect in the normal game state (FIG. 24(J)), or may be a different effect.

Win/lose notification is performed in response to the operation of the performance button 26 in the determination effect or in response to the elapse of a predetermined time. In the case of a big win, a winning notification is performed as a winning/losing notification (t4 in FIG. 33, (I) in FIG. 34).

Specifically, as an example of winning notification, a victory effect is performed at time t4. The victory effect is a effect for notifying that the character A has won in the battle effect. In addition, in the winning performance, a pattern-matching performance in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 55 of the same kind as the left and right decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the effect image 60 is displayed around the decorative patterns 55 in the middle area. This effect image 60 may be an image different from the effect image 60 (FIG. 24(K)) at the time of winning notification in the normal game state, or may be the same image.

In addition, at the time t4, as the victory effect, an accessory actuation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is activated may be performed instead of the design matching effect.

Also, immediately after the pattern matching effect is performed, the role product operation effect may be performed. That is, the big win may be reported using the movable accessory 7 immediately after the big win is reported using the decorative pattern 55 .

Following the pattern-matching effect or the accessory-activating effect, the first light-emitting effect is performed (t5 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(J)). The first light emitting effect is a effect performed with respect to the decorative pattern 55, and is a effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. - 特許庁For example, the first light emitting effect may be a effect of displaying the effect image 61 around each of the decorative patterns 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative patterns 55 emit light in a common luminescent color. The three decorative patterns 55 in the first light emitting performance are "large" in size and displayed in a non-character mode, and the decorative patterns 55 in the middle area are displayed larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55.例文帳に追加

This first light emitting effect may be the same effect as the first light emitting effect (FIG. 24(L)) in the normal game state, or may be a different effect. The execution time of the first light emission effect (Fig. 35 (J)) in the variable probability game state may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect (Fig. 24 (L)) in the normal game state. and may be the same.

After the first light emitting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 swing for a predetermined period (Fig. 35(K)). While the three decorative patterns 55 are swinging, the three decorative patterns 55 are "medium" in size and are in the non-character mode. Thereafter, a re-lottery effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 33, (L) in FIG. 35). In the re-lottery performance, a performance that fluctuates in a state where three same kinds of decorative patterns 55 are arranged is performed, and a performance that makes the player expect which kinds of decorative patterns 55 will stop together is performed.

After the re-lottery performance is performed, three decorative patterns 55 of any kind out of a plurality of kinds come together and stop. At this time, the second first light emission effect is performed (t7 in FIG. 33, (M) in FIG. 35). As in the case where the re-lottery effect is performed in the normal game state, the second first light emitting effect (Fig. 35 (M)) performed at time t7 is the first first light emitting effect (Fig. 35 (M)) performed at time t5. The effect may be different from that in FIG. 35(J), or may be the same effect. In the second first light emission effect, similarly to the first first light emission effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are displayed in a "large" size and without characters, and the decorative patterns in the middle area are displayed. 55 is displayed in the largest size.

After the second first light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 swing (t8 in FIG. 33, (N) in FIG. 35), and then three decorations in response to the stop of the second special pattern. The symbol 55 is finally stopped (t9 in FIG. 33, (O) in FIG. 35). During this time t8 to t9, the three decorative patterns 55 are displayed in the "medium" size and in a non-character mode. The time from when the first light emitting effect is performed in the variable probability game state to when the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped (the swinging period of the three decorative patterns 55) is the period after the first light emitting effect is performed in the normal game state. It is shorter than the time until the pattern 55 is actually stopped. Then, an opening performance suggesting the start of the jackpot game is performed (FIG. 35(P)).

In addition, in FIG. 33 and FIG. 35, in the winning notification in the probability variable gaming state, the re-lottery effect is performed, and the first light emitting effect is performed twice. may be performed only once. In addition, the second light emitting effect may be performed after the first light emitting effect even in the variable probability gaming state.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the variable effect when the second light emitting effect is performed after the first light emitting effect when the winning notification is performed in the variable probability game state. As shown in FIG. 36, after the first light emitting effect is performed between times t5 and t6, the second light emitting effect is performed at time t7. Then, the three decorative patterns 55 swing after the second light emitting effect, and the three decorative patterns 55 actually stop according to the stop of the special patterns. The time (swing period of the three decorative symbols 55) from when the second light emitting effect is performed in the variable probability game state until the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped is the second light emitting effect in the normal game state. It is shorter than the time until the pattern 55 is actually stopped.

Here, the second light emitting effect in the variable probability game state is the same effect as the second light emitting effect described in the normal game state, and is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself so that a part of each decorative pattern 55 emits light. This is an effect in which the effect image 62 (FIG. 24(N)) is displayed. It should be noted that the effect image displayed in the second light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state may be an image different from the effect image 62 displayed in the second light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state.

Further, even when the second light emitting effect is performed in the probability variable game state, the re-lottery effect may be performed after the first first light emitting effect, and the second first light emitting effect may be performed after the re-lottery effect. . Specifically, in this case, after the victory effect, the first light emission effect is performed for the first time, and then the re-lottery effect is performed. After the re-lottery performance, the first light emission performance is performed for the second time, and then the second light emission performance is further performed, and the three decorative patterns 55 are finally stopped.

Further, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined in the probability variation gaming state, the first light emission effect may not be performed, and only the second light emission effect may be performed.

Next, a description will be given of the variation effect when it is determined that the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination in the variable probability game state. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the screen when a 4R normal jackpot is determined in the variable probability gaming state. 34(B) to 34(G) are performed for the effects before the fixed effect shown in FIG. 37(H).

When the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination in the variable probability game state, the variation pattern OP6 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation performance is started. In this case, as in FIG. 33, pre-reach effects, battle start effects, and battle effects are performed in order, and a final effect (FIG. 37(H)) is performed at the end of the battle effect.

Then, after the deciding effect at the end of the battle effect, at time t4, a defeat effect is performed as a win notification (4R normal jackpot notification) (Fig. 37 (I-2)). In the defeat effect, a moving image showing that character A has been defeated is displayed. Also, in the defeat effect, decorative patterns different from the left and right stop in the middle area, resulting in a reach loss. The reach-losing eye in this variable probability gaming state indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is not a loss but a 4R normal jackpot. When decorative patterns different from left and right stop in the middle region, no effect image is displayed around the decorative patterns in the middle region. When decorative patterns different from left and right are stopped in the middle region, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative patterns in the middle region. The effect image displayed at this time may be an image different from or the same image as the effect image 60 (FIG. 34(I)) displayed during the victory effect. Further, when the defeat effect is performed, the first light effect and the second light effect are not performed. After the defeat effect, the screen is switched at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols in the probability variable gaming state, and the three decorative symbols swing while the left and right different types of decorative symbols are stopped in the middle area (Fig. 37 (J- 2)). When the special symbols are stopped, the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped, and the three small symbols 56 are also permanently stopped (FIG. 37(O)). Next, an opening effect is performed (FIG. 37(P)), and a jackpot game relating to the 4R normal jackpot is started. During the jackpot game relating to the opening effect and the 4R normal jackpot, a display is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. In addition, as shown in the figure, a result display showing the total number of prize balls won by the player, the number of jackpots, and the like after shifting to the variable probability gaming state is performed. In addition, when the 4R normal jackpot occurs in the variable probability game state, in the jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot, the opening time of the big winning opening 13 per 1R is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the player wins most of the prizes. You may make it impossible to win the ball. In addition, when the 4R normal jackpot is achieved in the probability variable gaming state, the opening time of the big winning opening 13 per 1R is 29.5 seconds at maximum, and the player may be able to win prize balls for 4R. . In this case, instead of the result display shown in FIG. 37(P), a jackpot performance showing a 4R normal jackpot may be performed.

(Lamp lighting effect during hit notification)
Here, the lamp lighting effect during the hit notification will be described in detail. As described above, during the winning notification, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light-emitting pattern (for example, a rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern) suggesting a big win. The lamp lighting effect related to the winning notification is performed at the timing when the winning notification starts (t7 in FIG. 22, T7-1 in FIG. 30, t4 in FIG. 33). Specifically, a command is transmitted from the production control unit 130 to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing at which the hit notification is started (for example, the timing at which the production button 26 is operated), and the lamp control unit 150 responds to the command. Based on this, the execution of the lamp lighting effect is started.

More specifically, the lamp lighting effect related to the winning notification is divided into effects corresponding to each effect of pattern matching effect (or character actuation effect), first light emitting effect, and second light emitting effect. For example, when the effect button 26 is operated while the screen of FIG. A lamp light-up effect corresponding to the symbol-matching effect (or the character-product operation effect in which the movable character object 7 appears in front of the screen) is executed. Next, at the timing after the predetermined period has passed, the lamp control section 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect (FIG. 24(L)). Furthermore, at the timing when the predetermined period has passed, the lamp control section 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect (FIG. 24(N)). The lamp lighting effect in each of these periods may be different. For example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in the first light emission pattern (for example, red) during the pattern matching effect (or the character actuation effect) shown in FIG. The light may be emitted in the second light emission pattern (for example, white) during the second light emission effect, and may be emitted in the third light emission pattern (for example, rainbow color) during the second light emission effect. It should be noted that, from the start of the pattern matching effect (or character actuation effect) shown in FIG. For example, it may emit light in a rainbow color). For example, during the pattern matching effect, during the first light emission effect, and during the second light emission effect, the lamp light emission effect is the same mode (for example, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in rainbow colors). good.

That is, the lamp light emission effect is performed in conjunction with the winning light effect (the first light effect and the second light effect). Here, "two effects are interlocked" means that when one effect is performed, the other effect corresponding to the one effect is performed. The mode of "interlocking" may be, for example, "a mode of using the same color", or a player who knows the pachinko game machine 1 using different colors will know that the other performance is being performed when he sees one performance. It may be "closely related aspects" to the extent that it is perceptible. Specifically, one example of "a mode using the same color" is that, along with the first light emission effect, the board lamp is generated by the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect in the same white as the effect image 61 related to the first light emission effect. 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are illuminated. In addition, an example of a "closely related aspect" is, for example, the board lamp 25 and/or the board lamp 25 and/or the board lamp 25 and/or the rainbow-colored light emission pattern for the second light emission effect along with the second light emission effect that displays the white effect image 62 . Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 is made to emit light. In addition, in this embodiment, if one effect (for example, lamp light emission) can recognize the other effect (for example, hit light emission effect), it is included in interlocking. For this reason, the two interlocking effects may be in a relationship in which each other is a dedicated effect (i.e., a one-to-one relationship), or a relationship in which one is a dedicated effect for the other but the opposite is not true (i.e., a one-to-many relationship) It's okay.

The start timing and end timing of the two interlocking effects do not necessarily have to match. Note that the effect controlled by the image sound control unit 140 and the effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, the effects are synchronized with the passage of time managed by each control unit. may be controlled accordingly. For example, the lamp lighting effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 is started in response to a command transmitted at the timing when the winning notification is started (for example, the timing when the effect button 26 is operated). After the lamp lighting effect is started according to the command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp lighting effect according to the passage of time. Also, at the same timing, the image and sound control section 140 performs the pattern-matching effect shown in FIG. These two effects are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing are controlled according to the passage of time managed by the respective control units. Note that the two effects may be executed while synchronizing during the execution of the effects. When executing two effects while synchronizing, for example, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. A control command is transmitted to , and in accordance with the command, the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect. Further, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24(N) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a control command is transmitted from the image sound control unit 140 to the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, and according to the command , the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp lighting effect corresponding to the second lighting effect.

It should be noted that the lamp light emission effect related to the winning notification ends when the big winning game starts. Specifically, the lamp light-emitting effect ends when a variation stop command or an opening command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130 .

In addition, in this embodiment, two effects may be "non-interlocked". For example, a specific example will be described in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 continuously emit light in a light emission pattern interlocking with the BGM that is continuously output from before the start of the N-reach production along with the N-reach production. In such a case, it can be recognized from the state of the liquid crystal screen 5 that the N-reach effect is being performed. On the other hand, it cannot be recognized that the N-reach effect is being performed from the light emission mode of the board lamp 25 and the like. In this manner, even if a player who knows the pachinko game machine 1 sees one of the effects (for example, the light emission of the board lamp 25, etc.), it is difficult to recognize that the other effect (for example, the N reach effect) is being performed. In some cases, the two renditions are "non-coordinated."

It should be noted that the reliability may be suggested by a lamp lighting effect related to the hit notification. For example, all of the first to third light emission patterns of the lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification may be light emission patterns using rainbow colors.

(Features of hit lighting effect)
As above, the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and second light emitting effect) in the normal game state and the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and second light emitting effect) in the variable probability game state have been described. Below, the features of these lighting effects will be described.

The display mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between the first light emitting effect during the winning notification and the second light emitting effect. For example, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the three decorative symbols 55 during the first light emitting effect are larger (or may be smaller) than the three decorative symbols during the second light emitting effect. Further, in the normal game state, the three decorative patterns 55 during the first light emitting effect may be in the non-character mode, while the three decorative patterns 55 in the second light emitting effect may be in the with character mode. In addition, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area during the first light emitting effect is higher than the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns 55, while the three during the second light emitting effect. The visibility of the decorative pattern 55 is the same. Specifically, the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region during the first light emitting effect is larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55, and the whole (or most) of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region is displayed on the screen. Since part of the left and right decorative patterns 55 are not displayed on the screen during the first light emitting effect, it can be said that the decorative patterns 55 in the middle area have higher visibility than the left and right decorative patterns 55 . On the other hand, it can be said that the size of the three decorative patterns 55 is the same and the visibility of the three decorative patterns 55 is the same during the second light emitting effect.

Also, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the area where the effect image 61 is displayed in the first light emission effect is larger than the area where the effect image 62 is displayed in the second light emission effect. Specifically, in the second light emission effect, the effect image 62 is displayed in a partial area of each decorative pattern 55, whereas in the first light emission effect, a relatively wide area around each decorative pattern 55 is displayed. , the effect image 61 is displayed.

In addition, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emitting effect is a non-character mode in which a character is not added to the number pattern, and the decorative pattern 55 during the second light emitting effect is a character added to the number pattern. It is a mode with character. The decoration pattern 55 during the second light emitting effect in the normal game state may be a non-character mode in which a character is not added to the number pattern. In addition, in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emitting effect is a characterless mode in which a character is not added to the number pattern, and the decorative pattern 55 during the second light emitting effect is also a character in the number pattern. is not added.

Also, in the normal game state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed during the winning notification. In the probability variable gaming state, while the first light emitting effect is performed during the winning notification, the second light emitting effect may not be performed. In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, the second light emitting effect may be performed without performing the first light emitting effect during the winning notification. It should be noted that both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may be performed even in the variable probability gaming state. For example, in the variable probability game state, after the first light emission effect is performed, there may be times when the second light emission effect is performed and when it is not performed.

Also, the execution time of the first light emission effect and the execution time of the second light emission effect are different. “Different execution times” means that at least one of the length of time required to execute each effect and the execution timing is different. Specifically, the execution time of the second light emission effect is longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect. In addition, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than the execution time of the first light emission effect.

Also, the execution time of the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect may vary depending on the game state. For example, the execution time of the second light emission effect may vary depending on the game state. For example, while the execution time of the second light emission effect is the same in the normal game state and the time saving game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the execution time of the first light emission effect may be the same in all game states. In addition, while the execution time of the first light emission effect varies depending on the game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be the same in all game states.

Also, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect to the start of the second light emitting effect may be the same regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 . Also, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may vary depending on the game state. For example, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect in the normal game state to the start of the second light emission effect is the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect in the variable probability game state to the second light emission It may be longer (or shorter) than the time up to the start of the production.

Also, the effect mode of the first light emitting effect itself and the effect mode of the second light emitting effect itself are different. The effect mode of the first light-emitting effect referred to here may be the type, color, or size of the effect image 61, or the sound output during the first light-emitting effect. The effect mode of the second light emission effect is the same. For example, the effect image 61 displayed around the decorative pattern 55 in the first light emitting effect and the effect image 62 added to the decorative pattern 55 in the second light emitting effect are different images.

Further, the lighting mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between during the first lighting effect and during the second lighting effect. For example, in the first light emission effect, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 55 momentarily emit light (the periphery of each decorative pattern 55 momentarily emits light). On the other hand, in the second light emission effect, each decorative pattern 55 simultaneously emits light, for example, from top to bottom (the light emitting portion of the decorative pattern 55 moves from top to bottom). Also, the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed beyond the region of the decorative pattern 55 centering on the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region. On the other hand, the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed within the area of each decorative pattern 55 .

Also, the effect mode of the first light emitting effect and/or the effect mode of the second light emitting effect may be the same or different regardless of the game state. For example, the effect mode of the first light emitting effect may be the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Also, the effect mode of the second light emitting effect may be the same in the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Further, the effect mode of the second light emitting effect is the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, while the effect mode of the first light emitting effect may be different between the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Conversely, the effect mode of the first light emission effect is the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, while the effect state of the second light emission effect may be different between the normal game state and the variable probability game state.

In addition, the number of executions of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect performed in one variation of the special symbol (jackpot variation) may be the same in all game states, or may differ depending on the game state. good too. For example, in the normal game state, the number of executions of the first light emitting effect may be greater than the number of times of executing the second light emitting effect in one variation of the special symbol (jackpot variation). For example, in the normal game state, the first light emitting effect may be performed twice and the second light emitting effect may be performed once in one variation of the special symbol (jackpot variation). Further, in the variable probability gaming state, the number of executions of the first light emitting effect and the number of times of executing the second light emitting effect in one variation of the special symbol may be the same. For example, in the probability variation gaming state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may be performed once each in one variation of the special symbol (jackpot variation). In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, the first light emitting effect is performed once or twice in one variation of the special symbol (big hit variation), and the second light emitting effect may not be performed.

In addition, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect to the final stop of the three decorative patterns 55 (swing period of the decorative patterns 55) may be the same in all game states. , may differ according to the game state. Further, the swing time from the end of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be the same in all game states, or may differ depending on the game state. In addition, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emitting effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all game states, or may be different depending on the game state. good. In addition, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 varies depending on the game state, while the start time (or end time) of the second light emission effect is different depending on the game state. The time from to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all game states. Conversely, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emission effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 varies depending on the game state, while the time at the start (or end) of the first light emission effect ) to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all game states.

In addition, when a big win is reported by a role product actuation effect instead of the pattern matching effect, the first light emission effect does not have to be performed during the character actuation effect. That is, when notifying the big win immediately after the determined effect, if the movable accessory is used instead of the decorative pattern 55 to notify the big win, the first light emission effect does not have to be performed. In this case, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emitting effect may be performed immediately after the re-lottery effect. Further, even when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emitting effect may not be performed immediately after the re-lottery effect.

Further, even if the type of the three decorative symbols 55 to be stopped is the first decorative symbol (decorative symbol suggesting a more advantageous jackpot for the player), the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are the second light emitting effect. (a decorative pattern that suggests a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player) is performed. For example, even if three odd patterns (for example, "3" patterns) are stopped, even if three even patterns (for example, "4" patterns) are stopped, the first light emission effect and the second light emission The performance is executed. Odd-numbered symbols are symbols that indicate a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than even-numbered symbols. Specifically, in the normal game state, when three odd-numbered symbols are aligned, it is suggested to shift to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot game, and when three even-numbered symbols are aligned, it is time-saving after the jackpot game. It suggests the possibility of shifting to a game state. In addition, in the variable probability game state, when three "7" symbols are aligned, a 10R variable probability jackpot is suggested, and when three other symbols are aligned, a 4R probability variable jackpot is suggested. In the normal game state, the effect modes of the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect when three odd symbols are stopped are the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect when three even symbols are stopped. / Or it may be different from the production mode of the second light emission production, or may be the same. Further, the effect mode may differ depending on the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped for the first light emitting effect, and the effect mode may be the same for the second light emitting effect regardless of the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped. Conversely, for the second light emission effect, the effect mode may differ depending on the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped, and for the first light emission effect, the effect mode may be the same regardless of the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped. Similarly, in the variable probability game state, when three symbols suggesting a 10R variable probability jackpot (a more advantageous jackpot for the player) are stopped together, and a 4R probability variable jackpot (a jackpot that is not more advantageous than the 10R probability variable jackpot) is stopped. The effect mode of the first light-emitting effect and/or the second light-emitting effect may be different between when three suggested symbols are stopped together.

Further, as described above, in the probability variation gaming state, the first symbol combination (symbol matching) indicates a probability variation jackpot, and after the symbols are aligned, the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect or second light emitting effect) is performed. The second symbol combination (ready-to-lose eyes) usually indicates a big hit and indicates that the hit light emitting effect is not performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a first decorative pattern (for example, an odd number pattern other than "7") indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot (for example, an odd number pattern other than "7") and a second decorative pattern (for example, an even number pattern) and a third decorative pattern (for example, “7” pattern) indicating that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot. When three of the first decorative symbols are aligned and stopped, or when three of the second decorative symbols are aligned and stopped, the rendering mode of the first light emission rendering is the first mode, and the third decoration. When three symbols are aligned and stopped, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be a second mode different from the first mode. That is, when symbols other than the third decorative symbols suggesting the most advantageous jackpot for the player stop together, the effect mode of the first light emitting effect is the same as the first light regardless of which decorative symbols stop. In the case where the third decorative symbols stop together, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be a second mode different from the first mode. It should be noted that the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be the same even when any of the first to third decorative symbols are stopped together. In addition, the effect mode of the second light emission effect is the first mode when the first or second decorative pattern is stopped in the same manner as the effect mode of the first light emission effect, and the third decorative pattern is stopped. If so, the second aspect may be used.

In addition, when a big win is notified by matching symbols, at least one of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect is always executed in all game states. On the other hand, when the big win is not reported due to the combination of symbols (in the case of reach loss or a big win accompanied by a shift to the normal game state in the probability variable game state), neither the first light emission performance nor the second light emission performance is executed. In addition, in the normal game state, the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect may be executed in the case of the normal jackpot, while in the variable probability game state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission are performed in the case of the normal jackpot. Do not perform any of the renditions.

Also, the output timing and the output time of the sounds (first winning light emitting effect sound, second winning light emitting effect sound) output accompanying the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the output of the second winning light effect sound accompanying the second light emitting effect is started after the output of the first winning light effect sound accompanying the first light emitting effect ends. On the other hand, in the probability variable gaming state, it may be possible to start outputting the second winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the second light emitting effect while outputting the first winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the first light emitting effect.

As described above, the winning light-emitting effects (the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect) are executed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the winning notification. When the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped, the winning light emitting performance is terminated, so that the player can be effectively notified of the big win without obstructing the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped. You can improve your interest.

Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the winning light emitting effect during the winning notification, another light emitting effect for the decorative pattern 55 is performed at a timing different from that during the winning notification. By performing these various light emitting effects, it is possible to perform various effects using decorative symbols at respective timings, thereby increasing the expectation of the player and improving the amusement.

(Non-reach mid-light effect)
Next, the light emission effect during non-reach in the present embodiment will be described. The light-emitting effect during non-reach is a effect suggesting that the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops during the variable display of the special pattern. In the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the non-ready state light emitting effect is performed in the case of "not in the ready-to-win state" and "in the case of displaying the decorative pattern 55". ``When it is not in a ready-to-win state'' means that the ready-to-win state has not been established even once since the variable display of the special pattern started, and the ready-to-win state has disappeared due to the decorative pattern 55 starting to change display again after the ready-to-win state has been established. Including cases. Further, "when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed" means when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed (that is, when it is not hidden), when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed, and when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed. including when it is immediately before

In the present embodiment, the non-reach lighting effect is executed when the reach state is not reached. In other words, it is possible to display the decorative pattern 55 in a manner that does not notify the jackpot. In this point, the execution timing is different from the win light emission performance executed when displaying the decorative pattern 55 of the big winning mode and the ready-to-win light emission performance (to be described later) executed when displaying the decorative pattern 55 of the ready-to-win mode. In addition, the light-emitting effect during non-reach is different in function from the chance effect that suggests reliability (that is, the look-ahead chance effect and the relevant chance effect, which will be described later) in that it does not suggest the reliability of the big win. Further, the light emission effect during non-reach in the present embodiment can be executed regardless of the variation pattern. In this respect, the execution conditions are different from those of the winning light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win light-emitting effect, and the chance eye effect.

When the light emission effect during non-reach is executed, an effect image (hereinafter referred to as "light emission effect image 70 during non-reach") is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 over the period from the start to the end. (See FIG. 39(F)). In addition, along with this, a light-emitting effect sound during non-reach (for example, a sound effect of “shuon”) is output from the speaker 24 . In this embodiment, the length of the display time of the light emission effect image 70 during non-reach and the output time of the light emission effect sound during non-reach are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship. For example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time.

The non-reach lighting effect image 70 and the non-reach lighting effect sound are output only in the non-reach lighting effect. The non-reach light-up effect image 70 is an image smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 relating to the hit light-up effect. In this embodiment, the same pattern is applied to any of the left pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the left row, the right pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the right row, and the middle pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the middle row. A light-emitting effect sound is output during reach. For this reason, depending on the non-reaching light emitting effect sound, it is not possible to know which pattern row the decorative pattern 55 to be temporarily stopped belongs to. On the other hand, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed centering on the symbol row of the decorative symbols 55 suggesting a temporary stop, but is not displayed centering on the symbol row not suggesting a temporary stop. For example, in the non-reach light emitting effect suggesting that the middle row decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed centering on the middle column, and centering on the left column (and right column). Do not show. For example, the symbol row that does not suggest a temporary stop may be displayed so that only the end portion of the light-emitting effect image 70 during non-reaching is overlaid, or the light-emitting effect image 70 during non-reaching is not displayed. good. As a result, it is possible to indicate in which symbol row the decorative symbol 55 is to be temporarily stopped by the light emission effect during non-reach. In addition, depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55, the aspect of the non-reach light emitting effect may be varied. For example, the "7" pattern may have a light-emitting effect image 70 during non-reach and a light-emitting effect sound during non-reach that are different from the other decorative patterns 55 .

In this embodiment, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, white flashing) for the light emission effect during the non-reach during the light emission effect during the non-reach. The light emission pattern for the light emission effect during non-reach is different from the light emission pattern for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the non-reach lighting effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. - 特許庁That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (interlocked) with respect to the non-reach light emitting effect.

The gaming machine 1 does not have to be provided with the light emission pattern of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 for light emission effect during non-reach. In this case, the board lamp 25 with a light emission pattern for other effects (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding (linked) to the BGM being output, or a light emission pattern when displaying a normal background image) during the non-reach light emission effect and the frame lamp 37 may emit light. In the case of such a configuration, it is impossible to recognize that the lighting effect during non-reach is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. - 特許庁That is, it can be said that the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (non-interlocking) with respect to the non-reach light emitting effect.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the non-ready light emitting effect differs depending on the game state. Specifically, for example, the execution time of the non-ready lighting effect itself is shorter in the probability variable gaming state than in the normal gaming state. For example, the execution time in the normal game state is 1 second, and the execution time in the variable probability game state is 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that the execution time of the light emitting effect during non-reach may be longer or the same in the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, in any game state, the execution time of the non-ready light emission effect is shorter than the execution time of the winning light emission effect. Depending on the game state (or in any game state), the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be shorter than or the same as the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect.

Further, in this embodiment, as the non-reach light emitting effect image 70, in the case of the normal game state, the corresponding decorative pattern corresponds to an effect (for example, a pale yellow image) that makes the lower part of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 appear to shine. 55 is superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 39(E)). In the case of the probability variable gaming state, an effect different from the above is displayed as the light-emitting effect image 70 during non-reach. For example, an effect (for example, a white image) is superimposed on the front side of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 so that the corresponding decorative pattern 55 explodes from the lower part so that the whole appears to shine (FIG. 42 ( C) and (D)). In this embodiment, the non-reach light emitting effect sound is the same regardless of the game state. However, in the case of the normal game state, it is output in a shorter output time than in the variable probability game state. In addition, you may output the light emission production sound during non-reach which differs according to a game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "scrolling speed" of the decorative symbols 55 when the non-ready lighting effect is started differs depending on the game state. The "scrolling speed" is the speed when the decorative pattern 55 is moved in the vertical direction, and the switching speed when the decorative pattern 55 is changed and displayed at the same place without being moved in the vertical direction. It is a concept that includes For example, during the normal game state, the light-emission effect image 70 during non-reach is displayed for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55 . During the variable probability game state, a light emission effect image 70 during non-reach is displayed for the decoration pattern 55 during low speed fluctuation. The low-speed variation is, for example, the scroll speed (variation speed) of the decorative pattern 55 that enables (or allows for easy recognition) the detailed aspects of the character image 551 and the number image 552 to be recognized. For example, the time during which one decorative pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is about 0.5 seconds. There are fast variations at speeds faster than slow variations. The high-speed fluctuation is, for example, a scroll speed (fluctuation speed) at which the variable display of the decorative pattern 55 can be recognized, but the detailed aspects of the decorative pattern 55 cannot be recognized (or are difficult to recognize). For example, the time during which one decorative pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is about 0.04 seconds. For example, the variation speed of the decorative symbols during high-speed variation is the same as the variation speed of the small symbols 56 (and the fourth symbols 57 and 59). Note that, in this embodiment, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are not scrolled. Therefore, the scroll speed of the decorative symbols during the temporary stop is 0, and the temporary stop is not included in the low speed fluctuation in this embodiment. In addition, when simply describing "display", it includes temporary stop, low-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation. Incidentally, the variation speed of the small pattern 56 (and the fourth symbols 57, 59) may be faster than the variation speed of the decorative pattern 55 during high speed variation as long as it is faster than the variation speed of the decorative pattern 55 during low speed variation. may be delayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the non-ready light emitting effects in the normal game state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 38, the execution timing of the non-ready lighting effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the normal game state. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach light emission effect when the three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in the normal game state. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach light emitting effect when the three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in the normal game state.

FIG. 38(A) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative pattern 55 in which the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%. Along with the variable display of the special symbol, in the present embodiment, a start effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the game state. The start effect in this embodiment is a effect emphasizing the decorative pattern 55 that starts the variable display by swinging (that is, slightly fluctuating) the decorative pattern 55 . Further, the start effect is also a effect suggesting that the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed. For example, the start effect in the normal game state is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second), and the decoration pattern 55 is swung by changing the pose of the character image 551 from the start to the end. In addition, in the start performance in the normal game state, along with the start of the start performance, the decorative pattern 55 as a whole bounces and becomes slightly larger, and the size is kept as it is until the end of the start performance. In this embodiment, the start effect ends in a state in which the character image 551 assumes a pose different from that at the start of the start effect (that is, a pose different from that during the main stop). As exemplified in FIG. 38(A), with the end of the start effect, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed while maintaining the state at the end of the start effect (FIGS. 39(B) and (C)). reference). In terms of size positioning in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 before the start of the start effect (that is, during the main stop) is a small "medium", which is larger than the "small". Also, the decorative pattern 55 enlarged by the start effect is a large "medium", which is smaller than the "large". In this way, even when the start effect is executed, the decorative pattern 55 is in the same mode at the start of the fluctuation and during the high-speed fluctuation in that the size is "medium" and the character is in the mode. As the starting effect, after the pose of the character image 551 is finished, the effect of changing the character image 551 to the same pose as during the main stop may be executed at the end of the pose.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), in the present embodiment, the three decorative symbols 55 simultaneously start high-speed fluctuation with the end of the start effect. In the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 changes at high speed while maintaining the size increased by the start effect and the pose of the character image 551 after movement (see FIG. 39(C)). Note that the decorative pattern 55 may change at a low speed between the end of the start effect and the start of the high speed change. Also, the execution time of the start effect may be varied for each symbol row. For example, when the execution time of the start effect is shorter in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the high-speed fluctuation starts in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Also, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 during the high-speed fluctuation may be the same as during the main stop. For example, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed to the mode of the actual stop and the high-speed fluctuation may be started along with the end of the start effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In this embodiment, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 during low speed fluctuation is the same as during high speed fluctuation (see FIGS. 39C and 39D). During the low speed fluctuation, it is not yet known which decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped. In addition, for example, the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern may start the low speed fluctuation in order, or after the left pattern and the right pattern start the low speed fluctuation at the same time, the middle pattern may start the low speed fluctuation with a delay. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at low speed, the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop at the same time in a losing mode in which reach is not established. do. In the normal game state, with the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 55, the non-reach light emitting effect for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55 (left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern in this example) is performed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 seconds). This suggests that the three decorative symbols 55 are then temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds). When the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, all the decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop until the decorative patterns 55 actually stop with the variable display of the special patterns from the start of the light emitting effect during non-reach. Note that the decorative pattern 55 may temporarily stop suddenly from the high speed fluctuation without passing through the low speed fluctuation.

In the normal game state, along with the non-reach lighting effect, the stop effect of changing the pose of the character image 551 is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). The stop effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the character image 551 performs a different action (or may be the same action) as the start effect. In this embodiment, the character image 551 is in a different pose from when the stop effect was started (specifically, for example, the same pose as during the actual stop), and the stop effect ends (FIGS. 39(E) and (G)). ). When the stop effect ends, the temporarily stopped character image 551 sways by continuing the action of inhaling and exhaling while maintaining the pose at the end of the stop effect. The number image 552 oscillates by, for example, repeating a slight enlargement and a slight reduction during the temporary stop regardless of whether or not the stop effect is being performed. In this way, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops (swings) from the start of the light emission effect during non-reach. Note that the size of the number image 552 may be reduced (or increased) by the stop effect. Further, the execution time of the light emission effect during non-reach may be longer or shorter than that of the stop effect. Further, in the stop effect, the character image 551 may be changed to the same pose as that at the end of the start effect at the end of the stop effect.

In the present embodiment, when a losing variation pattern is selected in the normal game state, the three decorative symbols 55 all simultaneously wither at a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds) before the actual stop to indicate that the actual stop is in progress. It is reduced to the same size (see FIG. 39(H)). When the decorative symbol 55 shrinks as described above, the player can recognize that the fluctuation will not continue (that is, it will not develop into a pseudo-run and will continue to lose). When the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, the three decorative patterns 55 wither when a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) elapses after the end of the light emission effect during non-reach. In terms of size in FIG. 18, the deflated decorative pattern 55 is a small "medium" and larger than "small". The decorative pattern 55 remains at this size and after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.7 seconds), the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped along with the stop display of the special pattern (see FIG. 39(I)). In addition, when a predetermined effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed, the decorative pattern 55 does not have to shrink as described above.

FIG. 38(B) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the losing variation pattern HP2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the losing variation pattern HP2 is selected, the production patterns of the decorative symbols 55 temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are selected with a probability of 100%.

When the losing variation pattern HP2 is selected, as in the case of HP1, the start performance is executed with the variation display of the special symbols, and then the three decorative symbols 55 are varied at high speed. Following the high-speed fluctuation, the left symbol first starts the low-speed fluctuation. During the low speed fluctuation of the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the left symbol starts to fluctuate at low speed, the left symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, the non-reach light emitting effect for the left symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the left pattern is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In addition, the right symbol starts to fluctuate at a low speed along with the temporary stop of the left symbol. For this reason, during the non-reach light emitting effect for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop effect is in progress), the right symbol is fluctuating at low speed, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed. In addition, the right symbol may be changed at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-ready lighting effect for the left symbol.

As exemplified in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the end of the non-reach lighting effect for the left symbol, the right symbol indicating a different number from the left symbol temporarily stops. . Along with this, the non-ready lighting effect for the right symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the right pattern is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In addition, the middle symbol starts to fluctuate at a low speed along with the temporary stop of the right symbol. For this reason, during the non-reach light emitting effect for the right pattern, the left pattern is temporarily stopped (and after the stop effect is completed), the right pattern is temporarily stopped (and is stopped), and the middle pattern is slow fluctuation. inside. In addition, the middle symbol may be changed at a low speed after (or before) the start of the light emitting effect during non-reach for the right symbol.

As exemplified in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the end of the light emitting effect during non-reach for the right symbol, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. Along with this, the non-reach light emitting effect for the middle pattern is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the medium pattern is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). During the non-reach light emission effect for the middle pattern, the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped (and after the stop effect is finished), and the middle pattern is temporarily stopped (and during the stop effect). When a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) elapses after the end of the non-reach light emitting effect for the middle pattern, the three decorative patterns 55 are slightly withered as a whole, as in the case where the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. becomes smaller (see FIG. 40(G)). Then, the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped along with the stop display of the special pattern (see FIG. 40(H)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a specific example of the effect shown in FIG. 38(A) will be described. FIG. 39(A) illustrates the situation when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed while the first special symbol is reserved. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 are permanently stopped in a losing mode, and the small patterns 56 having the same combination as the decorative patterns 55 are finally stopped. Further, along with this, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 indicating the failure are stopped and displayed. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 39A, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 55 in the losing mode may be permanently stopped above the left symbol (and the right symbol) on the screen. Incidentally, when the decorative symbols 55 in the jackpot mode are temporarily stopped (and permanently stopped), the three decorative symbols 55 are arranged in a straight line. The small pattern 56 is definitely stopped on a straight line regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. It should be noted that the decorative pattern 55 may also be permanently stopped on a straight line regardless of whether or not it is a big hit, similarly to the small pattern 56. - 特許庁The middle symbol during the final stop may be superimposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be superimposed on the back side.

In the example of FIG. 39(A), a pending number 52 is displayed at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 . In this example, the reserved number 52 indicates that the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 3 and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 0. In addition, it is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the start effect is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 39(B) exemplifies how the character image 551 is moved and the decorative pattern 55 is enlarged by the start effect. As illustrated in FIG. 39(B), in this embodiment, when the start effect is started in the normal game state, the middle symbol is superimposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, the small pattern 56 starts to fluctuate at high speed with the start of the start effect. Along with this, an animation is displayed in which the pending icon 51 is moved to the right such that the earliest pending icon 51 is displayed as the icon 53 being changed. Along with this, the value of the number reservation 52 indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is decreased by one.

As is clear from a comparison between (A) and (B) in FIG. 39, the size of the decorative pattern 55 is larger during the start effect than during the main stop. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 39(C), the decoration pattern 55 during high speed fluctuation is the same as that at the end of the start effect. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 39B, the decorative symbols 55 other than the decorative symbols 55 which are actually stopped are not displayed during the actual stop and during the start effect, and are started to be displayed when the high-speed fluctuation is started. be.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39(C) to (E), three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time through the low speed variation of the decorative symbols 55 that have changed at high speed with the end of the start effect. During the low speed fluctuation and during the temporary stop, the middle pattern is superimposed on the front side of the left and right patterns. Since FIG. 39 is an example when the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a non-reach losing mode. When the non-reach light emitting effect for each decorative pattern 55 is executed along with the temporary stop, as illustrated in FIGS. The lower part appears to glow. FIG. 39(E) exemplifies how the non-ready lighting effect and the stop effect are started with the temporary stop. Further, FIG. 39(F) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 39(E) (in addition, during non-reach lighting effect and stop effect). In addition, FIG. 39(G) illustrates the state immediately after the end of the non-reach lighting effect and the stop effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 39(G) to (I), the decorative pattern 55 is deflated during the temporary stop and then the actual stop. The small patterns fluctuate at high speed until the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped irrespective of whether or not the light emitting performance during non-reach is executed, and when the decorative pattern 55 is officially stopped, it is permanently stopped in the same combination as the decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加do.

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40(A) illustrates how the start effect is started with the variable display of the special symbols, similarly to FIG. 39(B). In this example, as indicated by the reserved number 52, the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 1, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 0. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 40(B) exemplifies how, of the decorative symbols 55 that fluctuate at high speed with the end of the start effect, the left pattern starts to fluctuate at low speed before the right and middle symbols. FIG. 40(C) exemplifies how the non-reach light emitting effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed when the left symbol is displayed. In the example of FIG. 40(C), the character image 551 of the left symbol is moved by the stop effect using the left symbol during the non-reach light emitting effect for the left symbol. At this time, the right symbol is in low speed fluctuation, and the middle symbol is in high speed fluctuation. As exemplified in FIG. 40(D), the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol continues until after the end of the light emission effect during non-reach for the left symbol (see FIG. 38(B)).

FIG. 40(E) exemplifies how the non-ready light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the right symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(E), the character image 551 of the right symbol is moved by the stop effect using the right symbol during the non-reach light emitting effect for the right symbol. At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. FIG. 40(F) exemplifies a state in which a light emission effect during non-reach corresponding to the middle symbol is executed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(F), the character image 551 of the medium symbol moves by the stop effect using the medium symbol during the non-reach light emitting effect for the medium symbol. At this time, all decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped. The middle symbol is superimposed and displayed in front of the left symbol and the right symbol during any of the high speed fluctuation, the low speed fluctuation, and the temporary stop. As illustrated in FIGS. 40(G) and (H), the decorative pattern 55 is deflated during the temporary stop and then the actual stop.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the light emitting effect during non-reach in the variable probability gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 41, the execution timing of the light emitting effect during non-reach in the variable probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 41 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of non-reach light emitting effect when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach light emitting effect when the three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in the variable probability gaming state.

FIG. 41(A) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the losing variation pattern HP4-2 is selected. In this embodiment, when the losing variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative pattern 55 in which the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), in the present embodiment, in the case of the variable probability gaming state, the start effect is executed with the variable display of the special symbol in a manner different from the normal gaming state. The start effect in the variable probability game state is executed in a shorter execution time (for example, 0.2 seconds) than in the normal game state. For example, in the start effect in the variable probability game state, the decorative pattern 55 performs an action of jumping upward (see FIG. 43(A)). At this time, unlike the normal game state, the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 do not change. With the end of the start effect, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 43(B)). It should be noted that the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed by the start effect even in the variable probability game state. In addition, in the case of the probability variable gaming state, the decorative pattern 55 may be changed at high speed in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is changing at high speed (for example, in a manner in which it is changed at high speed for only 0.1 seconds), or may be changed at high speed. It does not have to be changed.

As exemplified in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. The aspect (for example, shape and size) of the decorative pattern 55 during high speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation is the same as during the main stop. In addition, for example, the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern may start the low speed fluctuation in order, or after the left pattern and the right pattern start the low speed fluctuation at the same time, the middle pattern may start the low speed fluctuation with a delay. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) elapses after the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at low speed, the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern (all of which are ) is executed during non-reach. The light-emitting effect during non-reach in the variable probability game state is started during the low speed variation of the decorative pattern 55 with a shorter execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds) than in the normal game state. This suggests that the three decorative symbols 55 during the low speed fluctuation will then temporarily stop for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds). The three decorative patterns 55 during low speed fluctuation are temporarily stopped simultaneously in a failure mode in which the reach is not established during the non-reach light emitting performance. Then, for example, after the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, after 0.2 seconds) after the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped, the non-reach light emitting effect ends. When the losing variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.2 seconds) from the end of the non-ready lighting effect, the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped along with the stop display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, unlike the case of the normal game state, the stop effect is not executed in the variable probability game state.

FIG. 41(B) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the losing variation pattern HP4-1 or HP4-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is selected, the rendering patterns of the decorative symbols 55 to be temporarily stopped are selected with a probability of 100% in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(B), when the losing variation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern change from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation in the order of HP4-2. Different case. For example, during the low speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the non-reach light emitting effect for the left symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the right pattern and the middle pattern are fluctuating at high speed. At the end of the light emitting effect during non-reach for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the right symbol is fluctuating at low speed, and the middle symbol remains fluctuating at high speed. After that, during the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol, the light-emitting effect during non-reach for the right symbol is started in a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol remains in high speed fluctuation. At the end of the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. After that, during the low-speed fluctuation of the middle pattern, the non-ready lighting effect for the middle pattern is started in a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped. At the end of the non-reach medium light emitting effect for the medium pattern, the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped, and the medium pattern is in low speed fluctuation. When the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the end of the non-reach light emitting effect for the medium pattern, decoration is accompanied by the stop display of the special pattern The pattern 55 is finally stopped.

Comparing FIG. 38 and FIG. 41, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 55 from the execution of the non-ready light emitting effect to the final stop is longer in the normal game state than in the probability variable game state. . In this embodiment, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols 55 from the execution of the non-ready light emission effect to the final stop in the normal game state is the period of the temporary stop of the decorative symbols 55 from the execution of the winning light emission effect to the final stop. shorter than the suspension period. It should be noted that the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 55 from the execution of the light emitting effect during non-reach to the final stop may be the same regardless of the game state, and the normal game state is better than the variable probability game state. can be shorter.

Next, a specific example of the effect shown in FIG. 41(A) will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 42(A), when the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 0 and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 3, the start production is started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. It shows how it starts. The small pattern 56 starts to fluctuate at high speed with the start of the start effect. In addition, it is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. As illustrated in FIG. 42(A), in the present embodiment, even if the start effect is started in the variable probability game state, unlike the case of the normal game state, the aspect (for example, the shape) of the decorative pattern 55 changes during the main stop. do not have.

As illustrated in FIG. 42(C), in the variable probability game state, similarly to the case of the normal game state, the decoration pattern 55 fluctuates at high speed with the end of the start effect. After that, when the decorative pattern 55 fluctuates at a low speed, the non-reach light emitting effect for each of the three decorative patterns 55 is executed. As a result, as illustrated in FIGS. 42(C) and (D), the three decorative patterns 55 appear to be illuminated by the light-emission effect image 70 during non-reach. FIG. 42(C) exemplifies a state in which a light emission effect image 70 during non-reach is superimposed on the decoration pattern 55 that is fluctuating at low speed, and a light emission effect sound during non-reach is output from the speaker 24 . FIG. 43(D) exemplifies a state in which a non-reach light emission effect image 70 is superimposed on the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55, and a non-reach light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. there is Also, FIG. 42(E) illustrates the state immediately after the end of the non-reach lighting effect. As illustrated in FIG. 42(F), the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped in the same manner as during the non-ready light emitting effect along with the stop display of the second special pattern. The small patterns fluctuate at high speed until the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped irrespective of whether or not the light emitting performance during non-reach is executed, and when the decorative pattern 55 is officially stopped, it is permanently stopped in the same combination as the decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加do.

Next, a specific example of the effect shown in FIG. 41(B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(A), like FIG. 42(B), illustrates how the start effect is started with the variable display of the special symbols. In this example, as indicated by the reserved number 52, the reserved number for the first special symbol determination is 0, and the reserved number for the second special symbol determination is 2. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 43(B) illustrates how the decorative pattern 55 fluctuates at high speed with the end of the start effect. Also, FIG. 43(C) exemplifies the manner in which the light emission effect during non-reach is executed with respect to the left symbol that started the low speed variation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol. FIG. 43(C) exemplifies how the ready-to-win fan effect is executed after the non-reach light-emitting effect for the left symbol ends. In the example of FIG. 43(C), an effect for a ready-to-win effect is displayed extending from the lower end of the right symbol to the left and right, causing the right symbol to rub and appear to emit light as if it would stop. FIG. 43(E) exemplifies how the right symbol slides when the ready-to-win effect ends. FIG. 43(F) exemplifies a state in which the light emitting effect during non-reach is executed with respect to the right symbol showing a number different from the left symbol during low speed fluctuation. This allows the player to recognize that reach is established. When the light emitting effect during non-reach for the right pattern is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 43(G) and (H), during the period from the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern to the temporary stop, the light emitting effect during non-reach for the middle pattern is executed. As illustrated in FIGS. 43(I) and (J), after the decorative pattern 55 corresponding to the non-ready lighting effect is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special pattern.

FIG. 44 is a table for explaining the total number of non-ready light emitting effects for each variation pattern in the normal game state. As exemplified in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, in response to the variation patterns (HP1 and HP3) corresponding to the simple loss in which the pseudo-run cannot be executed, the non-reach light emitting effect is performed once for each decorative pattern. It is viable. Corresponding to the variation pattern (HP2) corresponding to the simple loss that can execute the pseudo-run once, it is possible to execute the light emission effect during non-reach twice for each decorative pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern corresponding to a simple loss that can be executed once in a pseudo-run, for example, three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily used as in FIGS. After stopping, a pseudo-continuation is executed in the same flow as in FIG. With the temporary stop of each decorative pattern 55 in the first variation and the first re-variation, the non-reach light emitting effect is executed.

In this embodiment, not only when the ready-to-win effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbol, but also when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the non-ready-to-light emission effect can be executed regardless of the game state. When the ready-to-win production is executed, during the period from the start of the pre-ready-to-reach production to the "ready-to-reach notification", as in the example of FIGS. It is viable. Note that the "ready-to-win notification" in this embodiment is an effect of outputting an effect sound from the speaker 24 in order to emphasize that the reach has been established. For example, in the ready-to-win notification, the speaker 24 outputs an effect sound (for example, "ready-to-win") that basically does not suggest the reliability of the big win. When the reliability of the big win is high, there is a case where the speaker 24 outputs an effect sound different from the above-described effect sound (for example, the effect sound of "chance") as a ready-to-win notification. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win notification can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

As exemplified in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, a variation pattern in which a pseudo run cannot be executed and a reach effect can be executed (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) Correspondingly, the left pattern and the right pattern can execute the non-reach light emitting effect once each. On the other hand, the light emission effect during non-reach corresponding to the medium symbol is 0 times (that is, unexecutable). For example, the light-emitting effect during non-reach corresponding to the left symbol is executed during the pre-reach effect. The non-reach light emitting effect corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the reach is established (immediately before the reach notification). In addition, the left pattern and the right pattern correspond to the variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) capable of executing one pseudo-run and reach effect. It is possible to execute the light emission effect during non-reach twice. For example, the non-reach light emitting effect is executed in the first variation and the first re-variation before the pseudo-continuation is performed. On the other hand, the light emission effect during non-reach corresponding to the middle pattern is one time, and is executed in the first variation. In addition, the left pattern and the right pattern correspond to the variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) that can execute two pseudo-runs and a ready-to-win effect. It is possible to execute the light emitting effect during non-reach three times each. For example, the non-reach light emitting effect is executed in the first variation before the pseudo-continuation is performed and the first and second re-variations. On the other hand, the light emission effect during non-reach corresponding to the middle symbol is two times, and is executed with the first variation and the first re-variation. In addition, corresponding to the variation pattern for the jackpot (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP 1 to 4) capable of executing three pseudo-runs and the ready-to-win effect, the light-emitting effect during non-reach is It can be executed at the same timing as in the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo-run and ready-to-win effect can be executed twice. In this embodiment, when the pseudo-run is executed three times, the jackpot is decided. Therefore, in order to emphasize the third re-variation rather than the non-reach light emission effect, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach light emission effect is not executed in the third re-change.

FIG. 45 is a table for explaining the total number of light-emitting effects during non-reach for each variation pattern in the variable probability gaming state. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the pseudo series is not executed in the variable probability gaming state. Therefore, the number of executions of the pseudo-run is 0 for any variation pattern. As exemplified in FIG. 45, it is possible to execute the non-reach light emitting effect once for each decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (HP4-2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the simple losing. In addition, in response to the variation pattern (OP5-1, OP5-2, OP6, and RP5 in this embodiment) that can execute reach production (that is, battle production), the left symbol executes non-reach light emitting production once. It is possible. On the other hand, the light emitting effect during non-reach corresponding to the right symbol and the middle symbol is 0 times (that is, unexecutable). In the variable probability game state, when the reach is established, the player has more expectations for the big win than in the normal game state. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to emphasize the establishment of the ready-to-win state rather than the lighting effect during the non-reaching state, a configuration is adopted in which the lighting effect during the non-reaching state corresponding to the right symbol is not executed when the ready-to-win state is established. It should be noted that even in the variable probability gaming state, similarly to the case of the normal gaming state, before the reach notification, the non-reach light emitting effect corresponding to the right symbol may be executed.

Comparing FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the left symbol can execute the non-ready light emitting effect regardless of the game state and the type of variation pattern. Further, regarding the left symbol, regardless of the game state, the medium symbol has a smaller number of times that the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed than the left symbol. The right symbol is the same number of times as the left symbol in the case of the normal game state, and the same number of times as the middle symbol in the case of the probability variation game state.

It should be noted that regardless of the game state, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, it is not necessary to execute the non-ready-to-light emission effect. In addition, in the case of the normal gaming state, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, it is possible to execute the light-emitting effect during non-reach, and in the case of the variable probability game state, light-emitting during non-reach when the ready-to-win effect (that is, battle effect) is executed. It may be impossible to perform the production.

In the present embodiment, the rate at which the light-emitting effect during non-reach is executed with respect to the decorative symbols 55 in the low speed fluctuation during the normal game state is 0%. That is, in the normal game state, the rate at which the scroll speed of the decorative symbols 55 is 0 (that is, during the temporary stop) at the start of the non-ready lighting effect is higher than the rate during the scrolling. Incidentally, in the stage A, it may be possible to execute the non-reach lighting effect for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55 . Further, in the stage B, it may be possible to execute the non-reach light emitting effect for the decorative pattern 55 during the low speed fluctuation. With such a configuration, the rate at which the scroll speed of the decorative pattern 55 is not 0 at the start of the non-ready lighting effect in the normal game state can be made 0% or more. It should be noted that it may be possible to execute non-reach light emitting effects for the decorative symbols 55 that are temporarily stopped in the variable probability gaming state.

Incidentally, in the normal mode, the stage A may be able to execute the light emitting effect during non-reach, and the stage B may not be able to execute the light emitting effect during non-reach. In the case of such a configuration, in the normal game state during the variable display of the special symbol, the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed with a probability of 50% (that is, the probability that it is stage A), whereas in the probability variable game state 100% probability that the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed.

In addition, when the losing variation pattern HP1 (or HP2) is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs one of the operations shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 38 in response to receiving the variation start command. The effect pattern may be determined by random number lottery.

In addition, there may be an effect pattern in which the right design is temporarily stopped together with the left design and then the middle design is temporarily stopped, or an effect pattern in which the left design is temporarily stopped and then the right design and the middle design are temporarily stopped at the same time. .

Further, the background image for the non-reach light emission effect may be superimposed on the front side of the normal background image with the start of the light emission effect during the non-reach time, so that the normal background image may appear to emit light. . The background image for the light emission effect during non-reach may be erased with the start of the main stop of the special symbol immediately after (or immediately before the start), or may be erased at the start of the next variation. In the case of such a configuration, the light emission effect image 70 during non-reach may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 by the light emission effect during non-reach, or may not be displayed.

In addition, while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the light emitting effect during non-reach may be started. In this case, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before the non-reach light emitting effect ends (or along with the end), or the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed after the non-reach light emitting effect ends. may be displayed (for example, temporary stop).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the non-reach light emitting effect may be started along with the display (for example, temporary stop) of the decorative pattern 55 .

As a starting effect, an effect (for example, a white image) may be superimposed on the front side of each decorative pattern 55 so that the entire decorative pattern 55 appears to shine.

(Reach light effect)
Next, the ready-to-reach lighting effect in this embodiment will be described. The ready-to-win lighting production is a production to emphasize that the ready-to-win has been established. In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the ready-to-win lighting effect is performed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed (temporarily stopped) in the ready-to-win state. That is, the ready-to-win lighting effect can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a manner that does not notify the jackpot. The ready-to-win effect can be executed regardless of winning or losing as long as it is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed. In this respect, in the case of the big winning variation pattern, it is different from the winning light emitting effect that can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the mode of notifying the big winning.

The ready-to-win light-emitting effect in this embodiment includes a first ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect, a second ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect, and a ready-to-win line effect. In the first ready-to-win pattern light emission effect, for example, when the decorative pattern 55 in the ready-to-win state is displayed (specifically, at a timing corresponding to the ready-to-win state), an effect image 80 in which the left and right patterns appear to emit light is displayed. This is an effect to be displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to (G)). In the first ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect, for example, one effect image 80 is simultaneously superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 with respect to the left pattern and the right pattern. In the present embodiment, the first ready-to-win symbol lighting effect causes the left symbol and the right symbol to emit light simultaneously in the same light emitting mode. Incidentally, accompanying the display of the effect image 80, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect of "knock") may be output from the speaker 24. FIG. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed, for example, with the start of the ready-to-win notification, for a longer execution time than the ready-to-win notification. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is a effect that does not suggest the reliability of the big win.

In this embodiment, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is an effect that can be executed regardless of the game state. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect in the probability variation gaming state is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed (see FIG. 53(C)). On the other hand, the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state is executed while the medium symbols are being displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to (G)). However, the first ready-to-win symbol lighting effect is not executed for the medium symbols (that is, the medium symbols do not appear to emit light). The effect image 80 may be different or the same depending on the game state. Incidentally, as the effect image 80, one image covering the left pattern and the right pattern may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect image 80 may be displayed once during one first ready-to-win pattern lighting effect, or may be intermittently displayed a plurality of times (the same image or different images may be used). Further, regardless of the game state, the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect may be executed while the middle symbol is being displayed.

In this embodiment, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emitting effect during the first reach symbol light emitting effect. The light emission pattern for the first ready-to-win symbol light emission effect is different from the light emission patterns for other effects. For this reason, it is possible to recognize that the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. - 特許庁That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (interlocked) with respect to the first reach symbol light emitting effect. It should be noted that the light emission pattern for the first ready-to-win symbol light emission effect may use a color that indicates the degree of reliability. The light emission pattern in this case may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the production control unit 130, or may be uniquely determined corresponding to the type of the ready-to-win production, or form the ready-to-win. It may be uniquely determined corresponding to the type of decorative pattern 55 .

The second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an effect image 82 in which the left and right symbols appear to emit light when the decoration symbol 55 in the ready-to-win state is displayed in the normal game state (FIG. 49). (L)). In the second ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect, for example, one effect image 82 is simultaneously superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 with respect to the left pattern and the right pattern. In this embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol are simultaneously illuminated in the same light emission mode by the second ready-to-win symbol light emission effect. Incidentally, accompanying the display of the effect image 82, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect of “shun”) may be output from the speaker 24. FIG. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed, for example, in a shorter execution time than the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect. Unlike the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-win effect was established (in this embodiment, during the SP development effect or during the SPSP development effect). It should be noted that both the SP development performance and the SPSP development performance are one of the ready-to-win performances for expecting a big win. The second reach symbol light emitting effect is an effect that is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed, and the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not executed for the middle symbol (that is, it seems that the middle symbol is emitting light. invisible). The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is a effect that does not suggest the reliability of the big win. In this embodiment, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect cannot be executed in the variable probability gaming state.

In this embodiment, during the second reach symbol light emission effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame with the light emission pattern for SP development effect (or SPSP development effect) (for example, the light emission pattern corresponding to (interlocked) with the BGM being output) Lamp 37 emits light. The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a light emission pattern for the second ready-to-win symbol light emission effect. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 does not correspond to the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 for the second ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect (non-interlocking).

In the reach line effect, for example, when the decorative pattern 55 in the ready-to-win state is displayed in the normal game state (in this embodiment, at the same time as the first reach pattern light emitting effect), the left pattern and the right pattern appear to emit light. This is an effect of displaying the reach line image 81 (see FIGS. 48(C) to (F)). Since the middle pattern during the reach line effect fluctuates at high speed (or low speed), it does not appear that the middle pattern is emitting light even when the reach line effect is executed. The reach line effect is started, for example, when the reach notification (and the first reach symbol light emitting effect) starts, and ends when the reach notification ends. After the end of the reach line effect, the first reach symbol light emitting effect ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the display time during which the reach line image 81 is displayed by the reach line effect is the same as the time during which the effect sound related to the reach notification is output from the speaker 24 . Further, in the present embodiment, the display time of the reach line image 81 is shorter than the display time of the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol light emitting effect. Note that the reach line image 81 may be displayed for the same period as the effect image 80 . Also, the reach line effect may be executed after the end of the first reach symbol light emitting effect (for example, after 1 second). In this case, the ready-to-win notification may be started with the start of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect, or may be started with the start of the ready-to-win line effect. In addition, the reach line production may be executed according to the establishment of the reach even in the variable probability gaming state (for example, along with the first reach symbol light emitting production).

In the reach line production in the present embodiment, a default reach line image 81 that basically does not indicate the reliability of the big win is superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 over the left pattern and the right pattern. When the reliability of the big win is high, an image including characters such as “chance” is displayed as the reach line image 81 . This reach line image 81 is an image suggesting that the reach line image 81 is more reliable than the default reach line image 81, and is an effect sound (for example, a voice saying "chance") output from the speaker 24 by the reach notification. represent the same content. In this embodiment, the reach line effect can be executed in the normal game state (that is, unexecutable in the variable probability game state). It should be noted that the reach line effect may be executed in the case of the variable probability gaming state. Note that the reach line image 81 may use a color that indicates the degree of reliability.

In this embodiment, during the reach line production, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern for reach line production. The light emission pattern for reach line production is different from the light emission patterns for other productions. In addition, the light emission pattern for the reach line effect is, for example, a light emission pattern that can be output simultaneously with the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light effect in a distinguishable manner. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the reach line effect is being executed also from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. - 特許庁That is, for the reach line effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (are interlocked). As an example, due to the light emission pattern for the reach line effect, the extended lines of the left and right ends of the reach line image 81 appear to shine in the same color as the reach line image 81, and the other parts are the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect. May emit light. In addition, a color indicating the degree of reliability may be used for the light emission pattern for the reach line effect. The light emission pattern in this case may be uniquely determined corresponding to the type of the reach line image 81, or by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130 regardless of the type of the reach line image 81. may be decided. Further, it may be determined uniquely corresponding to the type of ready-to-win effect, or may be determined uniquely to correspond to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the ready-to-win effect.

The effect image 80, the effect image 82, and the reach line image 81 are images different from each other. These images 80 to 82 are displayed only in the reach light effect. The effect image 80 is, for example, an image larger than the "medium" size decorative pattern 55, and is an image in which the central portion of the decorative pattern 55 appears to emit white light and the peripheral portion appears to emit yellow light (FIG. 48 ( C) to (G)). The effect image 82 is a white image smaller than the effect image 80 and obliquely crossing the decorative pattern 55 (see FIG. 48(L)). The reach line image 81 is a horizontally long image that is smaller than the effect image 80 and larger than the effect image 82 (see FIGS. 48(C) to (F)). The images 80-82 are similarly superimposed on both the left and right symbols. Therefore, the visibility when these images are displayed is the same between the left pattern and the right pattern. Also, the images 80 to 82 are images smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 relating to the winning light effect. Note that the effect image 62 may be reduced and displayed as the effect image 82 . It should be noted that the images 80 to 82 may have different modes depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55. FIG. For example, the “7” pattern may display images 80 to 82 different from those of the other decorative patterns 55 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the execution time of the reach light emitting effect itself (that is, the total execution time of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect) is higher than the normal game state. state is shorter. For example, the execution time in the normal game state is 3 seconds, and the execution time in the variable probability game state is 1 second. It should be noted that the execution time of the ready-to-win effect may be longer or the same in the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the ready-to-win lighting effect is shorter than the execution time of the winning lighting effect in any gaming state. Depending on the game state (or in any game state), the execution time of the winning light emission effect may be longer than or the same as the execution time of the ready-to-win light emission effect.

In this embodiment, as described above, the ready-to-win effect can be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long. Here, the expectation level is 30 to 50% even for highly reliable SPSP reach effects. For this reason, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed, the ratio of winning big wins as a whole is less than half. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation time is long, the appearance ratio of the ready-to-win lighting effect is higher than the appearance ratio of the winning lighting effect.

It should be noted that the ready-to-win lighting effect may be started while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 55 in the ready-to-win state may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before the ready-to-win effect ends (or along with the end), or the decorative pattern 55 is displayed after the ready-to-win effect ends. It may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the ready-to-win lighting effect may be started along with displaying the decorative pattern 55 (for example, temporarily stopping).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the ready-to-win lighting effect in the normal game state will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the execution timing of the ready-to-win lighting effects in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 46 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state. FIG. 47 is a time chart for explaining execution timings of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect and the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 46, the first reach symbol light-emitting effect and the reach line effect are executed as the reach light-emitting effect, and the second reach symbol light-emitting effect is not executed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win line effect, and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect are executed as the ready-to-win light emitting effect. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach line effect is executed at the same timing as the reach notification. Therefore, in FIGS. 46 and 47, illustration of the reach line effect is omitted. Note that the flow of effects during the winning notification and during the losing notification has been described with reference to FIGS.

In FIG. 46 (A), the winning or losing is notified in the N reach production (that is, it does not develop from the N reach production to the SP reach production, the SP SP reach production, or the special production) during the reach production when the variation pattern is selected The flow of the production is described. Corresponding to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46A, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed, but the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect cannot be executed. In this embodiment, the N reach effect is started during the reach notification and during the first reach symbol light emitting effect. Incidentally, the N-reach effect may be started when the ready-to-win effect is established, or may be started when the first reach symbol light-emitting effect is started (or ended). Also, the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect may be executed when the ready-to-win is established.

In FIG. 46(B), the N reach effect is not executed, and the winning or losing is notified in the SP reach effect (that is, the SP reach effect does not develop into the SP SP reach effect or the special effect) A variation pattern is selected. The flow of the production during the reach production is described. In response to such a variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect can be executed according to the ready-to-win establishment, but the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed. is. In addition, in the present embodiment, during the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect, the SP development effect is started along with the end of the ready-to-win notification. In addition, after the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect ends, the SP development effect ends, and the SP ready-to-win effect starts along with this.

FIG. 46(C) shows the flow of the production during the reach production when the N reach production and/or the SP reach production is not executed and the variation pattern in which the win or loss is notified in the SP SP reach production is selected. It is Corresponding to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(C), the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect can be executed according to the ready-to-win establishment, but the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed. is. In the present embodiment, during the first ready-to-win symbol lighting effect, the SPSP development effect is started when the ready-to-win notification ends. Further, after the first ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect ends, the SPSP development effect ends, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started along with this.

FIG. 46(D) shows the flow of the production during the ready-to-win production when the variation pattern in which the N-reach production is not executed and the SP ready-to-win production develops into the SPSP ready-to-win production and the win/loss is notified is selected. It is written. Corresponding to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(D), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed, but the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect cannot be executed. In the present embodiment, the second ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect in order to create a sense of unity between the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the N reach effect with a lower reliability than the SP ready reach effect develops into the SP SP reach effect, the sense of unity is not produced in these ready reach effects. Therefore, in order to emphasize that when the N-reach production develops into the SPSP-ready production, the second reach-symbol light-emitting production can be executed during the SPSP development production (Fig. 47(C)). reference). In addition, in the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed at the same timing as the case corresponding to the variation pattern in which the win or loss is notified in the SP reach effect (that is, it does not develop into the SP reach effect) (Fig. 46 ( B)).

In FIG. 47 (A), it develops from the N reach production to the SP reach production and the hit or loss is notified (that is, it does not develop from the SP reach production to the SP SP reach production, or the special production) When the variation pattern is selected. The flow of the production during the reach production is described. Corresponding to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47(A), the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is executed according to establishment of ready-to-win. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is started, for example, at the end of the SP development effect, and ends by the end of the SP development effect. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or may be ended with the end of the SP development effect.

FIG. 47(B) shows the flow of effects when a variation pattern is selected in which the N-reach effect develops into the SP-reach effect, and further develops into a special effect, in which a win or loss is reported. In addition, FIG. 47(D) shows the flow of effects when a variation pattern is selected in which the N-reach effect develops into the SP-reach effect, further develops into the SP-SP reach effect, and the win/loss is notified. . Corresponding to these fluctuation patterns, as illustrated in FIGS. 47(B) and (D), the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect and the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect are executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). be done. In the case of FIG. 47(D), as in the case of FIG. 46(D), the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect. This creates a sense of unity between the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance.

FIG. 47(C) shows the flow of effects when a variation pattern is selected in which the N-reach effect develops into the SPSP-ready effect and the win/loss is reported. Corresponding to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47(C), the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is started, for example, during the SPSP development effect and ends before the SPSP development effect ends. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be started with the start of the SPSP development effect, or may be ended with the end of the SPSP development effect.

In the present embodiment, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed in any of the SP ready-to-win effect and SPSP ready-to-win effect from the N ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 47). In addition, the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed even when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into any of the special effect and the SP ready-to-win effect.

The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be started with the end of the SP development effect. Also, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect or during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51, an example of the ready-to-win lighting effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the ready-to-win lighting effect in the normal game state. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the ready-to-win symbol lighting effect in the normal game state. 50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the normal game state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 48(A) and (B), in this example, reach is established with the "1" symbol. In addition, FIG. 48(A) illustrates a state when the non-reach light-emitting effect associated with the temporary stop of the left symbol ends. Further, FIG. 48(B) illustrates a situation when the ready-to-win state is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol, and the non-reach light-emitting effect associated with the temporary stop of the right symbol ends.

As illustrated in FIG. 48(C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the non-reach light emitting effect for the right symbol ends, the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the reach line Production and reach notification are started. FIG. 48(C) exemplifies a state in which the entirety of the left pattern and the right pattern (both in character mode) are illuminated by the effect image 80 relating to the first ready-to-win pattern lighting effect. Also, a sound effect related to the ready-to-win notification (for example, the part of "cha" in the voice of "chance") is output from the speaker 24. FIG. Along with this, a reach line image 81 is superimposed and displayed in front of the effect image 80 from the middle of the left pattern to the middle of the right pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 48(C), the effect image 80 is larger than the reach line image 81 at the start of the reach light effect. In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, characters such as "chance" are faintly floating. A high degree of reliability is suggested by the reach notification and the reach line effect. In addition, in the example of FIG. 48(C), the medium pattern and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The image relating to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the front side of the medium pattern and on the back side of the small pattern 56.例文帳に追加In addition, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the same ready-to-win mode as the decorative pattern 55 when the ready-to-win is established.

FIG. 48(D) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(C). As exemplified in FIG. 48(D), the left pattern and the right pattern continue to emit light due to the effect image 80 as a whole. Also, a moving image is displayed in which the reach line image 81 extends in front of the effect image 80 from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left pattern) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right pattern). In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, characters such as "chance" are clearly displayed. In addition, the speaker 24 outputs an effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the part of the “chance” sound of the “chance”). The ready-to-win notification is terminated by the output of this dramatic sound.

In the example of FIG. 48(D), the low-speed variation of the middle pattern is started by starting the N-reach effect. In this example, the medium symbol continues to fluctuate at a low speed until after the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is completed. The middle symbol during the first reach symbol emission effect is superimposed and displayed behind the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 . For this reason, it is in a state where it is partially hidden behind these images and cannot be seen. Although the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 overlap the middle pattern, it does not appear that the middle pattern is emitting light. The middle symbol may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 during the first reach symbol lighting effect.

In this embodiment, as exemplified in FIGS. 48(D) to (G), the middle symbol during the first reach symbol light emitting effect is when the first reach symbol light emitting effect is not executed (for example, during the N reach effect ) is a different aspect. Specifically, for example, a mode that looks dark or a mode with weak contrast may be used. In addition, it is not necessary to change the mode of the middle symbol during the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect.

FIG. 48(E) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(D). As exemplified in FIG. 48(E), the left pattern and the right pattern continue to emit light due to the effect image 80 as a whole. Also, as a reach line image 81 extending from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left pattern) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right pattern), a thin and small moving image is displayed so that the light converges. In this example, the characters "chance" included in the reach line image 81 have already been deleted. Therefore, as the reach line image 81 is reduced, it changes from a mode suggesting the reliability of the big win to a mode not suggesting it.

FIG. 48(F) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(E). As exemplified in FIG. 48(F), the effect image 80 is displayed superimposed on the left pattern and the right pattern, but the character image 552 of the left pattern and the right pattern is beginning to appear slightly transparent. . Also, the number image 552 of the left pattern and the right pattern is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 . As a result, it is possible to recognize in which decorative symbol 55 the ready-to-win has been established during the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect. In the example of FIG. 48(F), as the reach line image 81, a moving image is displayed in which the light from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left pattern) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right pattern) is further narrowed so that the light converges. be. The reach line image 81 is converged as it is and erased during the first reach symbol light emitting effect. As a result, the reach line effect ends.

FIG. 48(G) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(F). As illustrated in FIG. 48(G), the character image 552 of the left pattern and the right pattern is more transparent than in the case of FIG. 48(F). The number image 552 of the left pattern and the right pattern continues to be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 . The display positions of these decorative patterns 55 are moved so that the space between the left pattern and the right pattern is widened. Immediately after such a state, the effect image 80 is erased so as to burst. As a result, the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is completed. When the first ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect is completed, it becomes visible that the middle pattern is fluctuating at a low speed on the front side of the left and right patterns (see FIG. 48(H)). The widening of the space between the left pattern and the right pattern may be accompanied by the start of the first reach pattern light emitting effect (or reach line effect), or the end of the first reach pattern light emitting effect (or reach line effect). may accompany

FIG. 48(H) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(G). As shown in FIG. 48(H), with the end of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect, a predetermined character image 552 of the same character but different from before to the end of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is displayed. is displayed for the display time (for example, 1 second). When this display time elapses, as illustrated in FIG. 48(I), the character image 552 returns to the same state as before the start of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect (for example, see FIG. 48(B)). Such a change in the character image 552 further emphasizes that reach has been established. It should be noted that the character image 552 does not have to be changed with the end of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect.

Following FIG. 48 (I), in the case of a variation pattern that notifies a big hit in the N reach effect (that is, in the case of corresponding to the variation pattern OP1), for example, the effect after the pattern matching effect with "1" pattern matching is executed. A notification is made when it is done. Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description is omitted here. In the case of the variation pattern in which the loss notification is given in the N-reach effect, the game is temporarily stopped at the reach-loss eye, and then the actual stop is made (see FIGS. 51(a) and (b)). During the display of the ready-to-lose eye, none of the non-reach light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win light-emitting effect, the winning light-emitting effect, and the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed. In the case of the variation pattern that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect (or the SP reach effect), the medium pattern starts high speed variation as shown in FIG. 49(J).

Following FIG. 49(J), in the case of a variation pattern that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the medium pattern is hidden and the SP development effect is started as shown in FIG. 49(K). be. When the SP development effect starts, the decorative pattern 55 changes from the mode with characters to the mode without characters. As illustrated in FIG. 49(L), for example, the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is executed at the end of this SP development effect. FIG. 49(L) exemplifies how the upper left to lower right of the left pattern and the right pattern (both are character-less mode) are sparkling by the effect image 82 relating to the second ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect. In this embodiment, the left pattern and the right pattern move to the left and right upper ends of the liquid crystal screen 5 during the SP development effect. For example, during the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect, it is executed when the movement between the left symbol and the right symbol is completed. In addition, in the example of FIG. 49(K), the medium pattern and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. It should be noted that the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the same ready-to-win mode as the decorative pattern 55 during the second ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 49(M), when the SP development effect ends after the second ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect ends, the SP ready-to-win effect is started. For example, during the SP ready-to-win effect, chance-up may be performed to suggest high reliability, as illustrated in FIG. 49(O). In this example, when the chance up is not executed, the character A has his eyes and mouth closed (the default mode of the SP ready-to-win effect, see FIG. 49(N)). When the chance up is executed, the character A has its eyes and mouth open (see FIG. 49(O)). It should be noted that even if this chance-up is executed, there is a case where the winning is lost (note that if the chance-up is executed, it may always be a big win). The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have this chance-up lighting pattern, and the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default lighting pattern even when there is a chance-up. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not interlocked) with respect to chance up.

As exemplified in FIG. 49(P), after that, in the middle stage of the SP ready-to-win production, an effect is executed in which effect images imitating the effect button 26 are combined from the left, right, and downward directions. This effect is an effect that is executed immediately before the operation promoting effect, and is an effect that encourages the execution of the operation promoting effect. Subsequently, as exemplified in FIG. 50(Q), an operation prompting effect is executed. This operation promotion effect may be the same mode as the operation promotion effect during the final effect, or may be a different mode. At the start of the valid period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed on the front side of this image may be displayed as the operation prompting image 65 . For example, with this effect image, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail may become visible. Note that, in the operation promotion effect, as an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail, an image without operation and an image with operation may be alternately displayed at the same position from the start to the end of the valid period. . The no-operation image is an effect image imitating the effect button 26 in a state of not being operated. The operated image is an image simulating the effect button 26 in an operated state (that is, in a pressed state). By alternately displaying such an image in a non-operated state and an image in an operated state, the operation of the performance button 26 is represented, prompting the player to operate the button.

In this embodiment, according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined effective period), the cut-in image suggesting the reliability is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). There are cases where the image is displayed superimposed on the decorative pattern 55), and where the pattern matching effect is executed (see FIGS. 50(S) and (T)). When the cut-in image (for example, the image labeled "I can't lose!" displayed at the right end of FIG. 50(S)) is displayed, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed until the final stage. On the other hand, when the pattern-matching effect is executed, the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed until the final stage, and the hit notification is given during the SP ready-to-win effect. The details of the hit notification are omitted because they have been described above. In addition, during the production related to the operation promotion production including the production of the stimulation and the production of displaying the cut-in image, the board lamp 25 is illuminated with the light emission pattern for these productions (that is, the light emission pattern different from the light emission pattern for other productions). and/or the frame lamp 37 emits light. Therefore, in this respect, the liquid crystal screen 5 is different from the chance-up in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are not associated (non-interlocked).

As exemplified in FIG. 50(U), after that, at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, an effect image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in which something happens. This production is a production that is executed only immediately before the final production, and is a production that encourages the execution of the final production. Subsequently, as exemplified in FIG. 50(V), a deciding effect is executed. This decision effect may be the same mode as the operation promotion effect in the middle stage of the SP ready-to-win effect, or in the case of high reliability, it is executed in a different mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIGS. 50 (V) and (W)). may At the start of the valid period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed on the front side of this image may be displayed as the operation prompting image 65 . For example, with this effect image, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail may become visible.

In the case of a variation pattern that notifies the jackpot in the SP reach production, for example, according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period), for example, the production after the pattern matching production with the “1” pattern matching is executed. A notification is made when it is done. Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description is omitted here. In the case of the variation pattern of notifying the loss or winning in the SP reach production, and in the case of the variation pattern developing from the SP reach production to the SP SP reach production or special production, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops at the reach loss (Fig. 50 (X ) and FIG. 51(Y)). It should be noted that, at this time point, it has not been decided that the decorative pattern 55 will be permanently stopped in the lost mode (that is, it is a provisional loss). 18, the size of the middle pattern during the temporary stop at the reach-losing eye is from "medium", which is smaller than "large" but is larger, to "medium", which is almost the same size as during the pre-reach production. change in size.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the losing notification in the reach losing eye, the light emitting effect during non-reach is not executed. In this respect, even if the same loss notification is given, it is different from the fact that the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed when the reach is not established. Further, in the present embodiment, while the ready-to-win losing eye is displayed, the ready-to-win light emitting effect, the winning light emitting effect, and the chance eye light emitting effect are not executed.

In the case of a variation pattern that notifies SPSP ready-to-win performance or special performance but notifies loss or hit, the model name display as shown in FIG. 51 (Z) following FIG. 2 seconds). The model name display is, for example, an effect of darkening the liquid crystal screen 5 and displaying the characters of the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, "ass wrestling". In the present embodiment, after the model name is displayed, a failure is basically notified. For this reason, basically (specifically, for example, in the case of a variation pattern that notifies SPSP reach effects or special effects without developing to a loss notification), the normal background image returns and the same reach loss as immediately before the model name display After the decorative pattern 55 with character is temporarily stopped by the combination of the eyes, it is permanently stopped (the flow of (Z)→(A)→(B) in FIG. 51). During the display of the ready-to-lose eye, none of the non-reach light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win light-emitting effect, the hit light-emitting effect, and the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed.

In some percentage (for example, about 30% of the jackpots reported in the SP reach effect), the model name display ends after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the model name display is executed, and the jackpot is announced. be notified. In this case, for example, following the display of the model name, a winning notification is made in which the performance after the pattern matching effect with the pattern matching effect of "1" pattern matching (or "7" pattern matching instead of "1" pattern matching) is executed. . Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description is omitted here.

In the case of a variation pattern that develops into a special effect, the effects shown in FIG. 31(C) and after are executed following FIG. 51(Y) (description here is omitted). In the case of the variation pattern that develops into the SPSP ready-to-win production, the SPSP development production shown in FIG. 51(d) is executed following FIG. 51(Y). In such a flow, the second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect. In the SPSP ready-to-win effect following the SPSP development effect, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, in the final stage, a final effect may be executed (see FIG. 51(f)). The mode of the final effect may be the same mode as the operation promoting effect in the middle stage of the SP ready-to-win effect, or may be a mode in which an image imitating the projecting effect button 26 in detail is always displayed in the case of high reliability or regardless of the reliability. .

In the case of the variation pattern of notifying the loss in the SPSP ready-to-win effect, according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period), the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped at the ready-to-miss eye (see FIG. 51(g)). In the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the middle pattern during the temporary stop at the ready-to-win losing eye is "medium" which is almost the same size as during the ready-to-win effect. In the case of a failure, after the model name is displayed following FIG. and (b)). During the display of the ready-to-lose eye, none of the non-reach light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win light-emitting effect, the hit light-emitting effect, and the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern to notify the hit in the SPSP reach effect, according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period), for example, the effect after the pattern matching effect with the “1” pattern matching is executed. A notification will be made when it is done. It should be noted that, in the case of a variation pattern that notifies a hit in the SPSP reach effect, the model name display is performed following (to) and (g) in FIG. There is also a case where the winning notification that the effects after the symbol matching effect are executed after the pattern matching effect is performed (the flow of FIG. 51 (G)→(Z)→(C)). Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description is omitted here. It should be noted that if the model name display is executed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect, it may always result in a loss. That is, the model name display may be an effect that suggests the possibility of losing if executed after the SP ready-to-win effect, and suggests that the loss is confirmed if executed after the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the ready-to-win lighting effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 52, the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 52, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed as the ready-to-win light emitting effect, and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect and the ready-to-win line effect are not executed. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed in response to establishment of ready-to-win as in the case of the normal game state. Further, the ready-to-win notification is executed along with the start of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect as in the case of the normal game state. As illustrated in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, the ready-to-win notification ends during the first ready-to-win symbol light emission effect, and the battle start effect is started accordingly. Note that the flow of effects during the winning notification and during the losing notification has been described with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, an example of the ready-to-win lighting effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 53(A) and (B), in this example, reach is established with the "3" symbol. Incidentally, FIG. 53(A) exemplifies a state in which the non-ready light emitting effect associated with the temporary stop of the left symbol is completed, and the ready-to-win effect that encourages the temporary stop of the 3 symbols as the right symbol is executed. . In the ready-to-win effect, for example, an effect image is displayed in which the lower portion of the right pattern appears to emit light due to friction (see FIG. 53(A)). After the ready-to-win provocation production, there are cases in which the ready-to-win is established and cases in which the ready-to-win is not established. FIG. 53(B) exemplifies the situation when reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, unlike the case of the normal game state, in the variable probability game state, the non-reach light emitting effect associated with the temporary stop of the right symbol is not executed (see FIG. 45).

As exemplified in FIG. 53(C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has passed since the right symbol temporarily stopped, the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect and the ready-to-win notification are started. . FIG. 53(C) exemplifies a state in which the entire left and right symbols are illuminated by the effect image 80 relating to the first ready-to-win symbol lighting effect. In addition, an effect sound (for example, a voice saying “reach”) relating to the reach notification is output from the speaker 24 . The ready-to-win notification ends when the output of the dramatic sound ends. In addition, in the example of FIG. 53(C), the middle pattern is not displayed. Also, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed. In this example, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed until the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped. In addition, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative pattern 55 when the ready-to-win state is established.

FIG. 53(D) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 53(C). As illustrated in FIG. 53(D), the left pattern and the right pattern become smaller while the whole continues to emit light due to the effect image 80 . Along with this, the left pattern moves to the left end of the screen, and the right pattern moves to the right end of the screen. Subsequently, as exemplified in FIG. 53(E), the left pattern and the right pattern complete movement to both ends of the screen while the effect image 80 continues to emit light, and do not become smaller. FIG. 53(E) illustrates how the battle start effect is started during the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect. The effect image 80 is erased so as to burst during the battle start effect, thereby ending the first ready-to-win pattern light emission effect. In addition, in the first ready-to-win pattern light emitting effect in the variable probability game state, until the end of the effect, the decorative pattern 55 can be slightly seen through the effect image 80 as shown in FIG. 53(E). do not become. In this respect, it differs from the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect in the normal game state in which the number image 552 becomes visible during the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect (see FIG. 48(F)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 53(F) and (G), when the battle start effect ends, the battle effect is started. For example, during the battle presentation, chance-up may be performed to suggest high reliability, as illustrated in FIG. 53(F). In this example, when the chance-up is not executed, there is no flag next to the character who wrestles the buttocks (default mode of battle presentation, see FIG. 53(G)). When the chance up is executed, a flag is displayed next to the character who wrestles the buttocks (see FIG. 53(F)). It should be noted that even if this chance-up is executed, there is a case where the winning is lost (note that if the chance-up is executed, it may always be a big win). The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have this chance-up lighting pattern, and the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default lighting pattern even when there is a chance-up. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not interlocked) with respect to chance up.

Following FIG. 53(F) or (G), as illustrated in FIG. 54(H), an image prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed at the end of the battle effect. This production is a production that is executed only immediately before the final production, and is a production that encourages the execution of the final production. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), a final effect is executed. In this determination effect, the character for which the victory effect is executed when the player wins in the battle effect is superimposed on the full screen behind the operation prompting image 65 and the effective period image 651.例文帳に追加In this respect, it differs from the operation promoting effect (for example, the aspect illustrated in FIGS. 50(Q) and (R)) in the case of the normal game state (the same aspect may be used). As illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), as the operation prompting image 65, a white effect image is displayed at the start of the valid period, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), this effect image is displayed. When erased, an image simulating the projecting effect button 26 in detail may be clearly visible.

In the case of the variation pattern of the big hit, for example, according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period), for example, the "3" pattern matching effect after the pattern matching effect is executed. (See FIG. 54(K)). Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description is omitted here. In the case of the variation pattern of loss, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating the loss (see FIG. 54(L)). In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable probability gaming state, the combination of the decorative pattern 55 in the reach state and the middle pattern indicating the number obtained by adding (or subtracting) 2 to the number indicated by the decorative pattern 55 in the reach state is a loss. It is an embodiment shown. In the case of the loss notification by the reach loss eyes, the non-reach light emitting effect is not executed. In this respect, even in the case of the variable probability game state, similarly to the case of the normal game state, even if the same loss notification is given, the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed when the reach is not established. It should be noted that while the ready-to-lose eye is displayed, the ready-to-win light-emitting effect, the winning light-emitting effect, and the chance eye light-emitting effect are not executed. In addition, regarding the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the medium pattern during the temporary stop at the ready-to-win losing eye is "medium", which is almost the same size as during the pre-ready-to-reach effect.

Subsequently, the model name display as exemplified in FIG. 54(M) is performed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 2 seconds). In this embodiment, the model name display in the variable probability gaming state is slightly different from that in the normal gaming state. For example, the liquid crystal screen 5 is darkened, and the character "ass sumo", which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, and the main character (for example, character A) are displayed. It should be noted that the mode of displaying the model name may be the same regardless of the gaming state. In this embodiment, after the model name is displayed in the variable probability gaming state, a loss is always notified. For this reason, the model name display in the probability variable gaming state functions as an effect that suggests a loss. Along with the end of the model name display, the background image for probability variation is displayed, and the decorative pattern 55 without characters is temporarily stopped by the same combination of reach-loss as immediately before the model name display, and then the main stop (Fig. 54) (N) and (O)). In addition, a big hit may be notified via a model name display. In this case, at a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) after the execution of the model name display, for example, "3" pattern matching (or "7" pattern matching instead of "3" pattern matching) is performed. may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 55 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect in the normal game state. In addition, FIG. 55 shows the case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification. In FIG. 55, the name of the effect is described below the total number of times of the effect corresponding to the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stopped during the reach light effect and the hit light effect. Concretely, it will be explained with reference to the column of "variation pattern corresponding to establishment of reach→N reach→jackpot". For example, in such a variation pattern in which the hit is notified by the N-reach effect, the total number of times of the left pattern is 3 times, the total number of times of the right pattern is also 3 times, and the total number of times of the middle pattern is 2 times. . For the left symbol, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect are executed. Similarly, the first ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect are executed for the right symbol. A first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect are executed for the medium symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, in the case of the normal game state, the middle symbol has a smaller total number of times than the left symbol (or right symbol) regardless of the variation pattern. Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the type of effect to be executed is also the same. . As for the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, there are an executable variation pattern and an unexecutable variation pattern. For this reason, the total number of times of the left pattern and the right pattern may differ depending on the type of variation pattern. Reach light emitting effect is not executed for medium symbols. As for the hit light emitting effect, it can be executed in the case of a big win regardless of the game state, but cannot be executed in the case of a loss. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the number of times is two regardless of the variation pattern, and in the case of a loss, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect and the hit light emitting effect in the variable probability game state will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 56, the name of the effect is described below the total number of times of the effect corresponding to the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stopped during the reach light effect and the hit light effect. Further, FIG. 56 shows the case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification, similarly to FIG. Specifically, the description will be made with reference to the column of "establishment of ready-to-win → battle effect → victory effect → variation pattern corresponding to big win". For example, in such a winning variation pattern, the total number of left symbols is 3, the total number of right symbols is 3, and the total number of middle symbols is 2. For the left symbol (and right symbol), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect are executed. A first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect are executed for the medium symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state as well as in the normal gaming state, the total number of times of the middle symbol is more than the left symbol (or the right symbol) even if it is any variation pattern few. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the type of effect to be executed is also the same. . For medium symbols, the number of times is two in the variation pattern in which the winning effect is executed among the big hits. Further, in the case of a variation pattern in which a defeat effect is executed in the big win and a variation pattern in which a draw effect is lost, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

In both cases of FIGS. 55 and 56, in the case of the flow in which the second first light emitting effect is executed after the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification (see FIG. 27), the variation pattern of each jackpot Corresponding to , the total number of times is increased by one for the second first light emission effect.

Comparing FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, the normal gaming state is more relative to the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect than the case of the variable probability game state. can be executed many times. In addition, regarding each of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, the total number of times of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect may be the same regardless of the game state, or the normal game state. The case may be less than the case of the probability variation gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect can be executed. In any game state (or in a predetermined game state), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may not be executed, and the hit light-emitting effect may be executed. As a result, any of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern will be twice (first light emitting effect and second light emitting effect) in the case of a big hit, and will be 0 times in the case of a loss. That is, the total number of times of the above effects (specifically, the number of times of winning light emitting effects only) is the same for the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern regardless of whether or not it is a big hit. In such a configuration, the reach line effect may or may not be executable.

In addition, in the normal game state, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the winning light-emitting effect, and the light emitting effect during non-reach (see FIGS. 44 and 55) during the variable display of one special symbol. The total number of times is the same for the left pattern and the right pattern, and the middle pattern is the smallest. In the variable probability game state, the total number of times of the above effects during one time of variable display of the special symbols increases in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (see FIGS. 45 and 56). Incidentally, the total number of times of the above effects may be the same for each of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state, there are cases where specific symbols showing contents other than numbers are displayed as decorative symbols. The specific symbol is, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify that a pseudo-continuous will be executed, or a development symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify a development destination effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect). Corresponding to the specific pattern, there is no case where non-ready light emitting effect, ready reach light emitting effect and winning light emitting effect are executed. For this reason, the total number of times of the above effects for the specific symbol is 0 regardless of the game state. It should be noted that in other embodiments, the above effect may be executed in correspondence with the specific symbols regardless of the game state, or in the case of a specific game state (for example, normal game state), in correspondence with the specific symbols. The above effects may be executed. Further, while the above-described effect is executed for a predetermined specific symbol (for example, pseudo-continuous symbol), the above-described effect may not be executed for other specific symbols (for example, extended symbol).

In this embodiment, during the variable display of one special symbol, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the hit light-emitting effect correspond to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped when the ready-to-win is established. may be executed. On the other hand, during the variable display, there is no case where the light emission effect is executed corresponding to the decoration pattern 55 that is not temporarily stopped when the ready-to-win game is established. Therefore, the decorative symbols 55 that are temporarily stopped when the ready-to-win state is established have a higher execution ratio of the above-described light emitting effect than the decorative symbols 55 that are not temporarily stopped when the ready-to-win state is established.

In addition, regarding the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect, the number of executions during the variable display of one special symbol is higher in the case of the normal game state than in the case of the variable game state. many. In addition, regardless of the game state, the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect and the second ready-to-win light emitting effect may be the same, and the case of the normal game state may be less than the case of the variable probability game state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 44, 45, 55, and 56, light emitting effects for each variation pattern (in this paragraph, non-reach light emitting effect, first reach symbol light emitting effect, second reach symbol light emitting effect, second 1 light emission effect, the total number of times of the second light emission effect) is different according to the variation pattern. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the hit is notified by N reach effects that cannot be executed, the non-reach light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol, the non-reach light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol, and the first reach symbol light emission. It is 5 times of production, the 1st light emission production, and the 2nd light emission production. Further, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which a pseudo-run is unexecutable and the SP ready-to-win effect developed from the N-reach effect is used to notify the hit, light is emitted in the case of a variation pattern in which the hit is announced by the N-reach effect in which the pseudo-run is unexecutable. Since the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed in addition to the effect, the total number of times is six. In this example, the total number of light emission effects is the same for the two variation patterns until the end of the N reach effect, and is different for the two variation patterns after the end of the N reach effect. In this way, by partially varying the total number of light emission effects according to the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. In addition, the total number of light emission effects may be different for each variation pattern. That is, when there are a plurality of variation patterns that can execute a predetermined effect, the total number of times is different for each variation pattern, both in the portion until the end of the predetermined effect (for example, N reach effect) and the portion after the end of the predetermined effect. may

It should be noted that the effect image 80 of a color suggesting the level of reliability may be displayed by the first ready-to-win symbol lighting effect. In addition, the effect image 82 of a color suggesting the degree of reliability may be displayed by the second ready-to-win symbol lighting effect. The colors of the effect images 80 and 82 may be determined by, for example, a random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130, or may be uniquely determined corresponding to the type of ready-to-win effect. It may be uniquely determined corresponding to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

(Chance eye lighting effect)
Next, a description will be given of the chance eye lighting effect when the chance eye is stopped. Here, the chance eye itself does not indicate that it is a big win, but it is a specification that suggests the possibility of a big win in the fluctuation of the current special symbol or the fluctuation of the current special symbol. is a decorative pattern (or a combination of specific decorative patterns). A chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big win in subsequent fluctuations is called a "forecast chance eye". The look-ahead chance eye is an effect performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, and is an effect over variation of one or more special symbols.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are classified into a plurality of types for each color suggesting high or low reliability. Specifically, the decorative patterns are blue patterns (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8” even patterns) and green patterns (“1”, “5”, “8”). It is classified into "9" odd-numbered symbols) and red symbols ("3" and "7" symbols). A combination of three decorative symbols of the same classification constitutes a look-ahead chance eye. A pre-reading chance eye composed of blue symbols is called a "blue chance eye", a pre-reading chance eye composed of green symbols is called a "green chance eye", and a pre-reading chance eye composed of red symbols is called a "red chance eye". For example, a combination of decorative symbols "442" and "664" in order from the left is a blue chance eye. In addition, depending on the classification of each decorative pattern that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye, the reliability of the big hit in the fluctuation of the special pattern after the next time differs. Specifically, the reliability increases in the order of blue chance, green chance, and red chance. Further, when a look-ahead chance eye is displayed, a look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect is performed for each decorative pattern 55.例文帳に追加

Hereinafter, the look-ahead chance lighting effect in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects over variations of a plurality of special symbols when a look-ahead chance number is displayed. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58(A), for example, when two first special symbol determination rights (suspended icons 51a and 51b) are suspended, time t0 during variation of the first special symbol , when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the right of the first special symbol determination relating to the winning is reserved (the "holding icon 51c" is newly added). Here, the pending icons 51a, 51b, and 51c are denoted as "suspended 1," "suspended 2," and "suspended 3," respectively. Pre-determination is performed when the game ball related to this hold 3 wins. This right to be subject to prior determination is referred to as a "prefetch target".

Next, at time t1, the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation effect ends, and a loss is reported (FIG. 58(A)). Next, at time t2, the first special symbol determination relating to reservation 1 is performed, and three decorative symbols 55 start to vary according to the start of variation of the first special symbol (FIG. 58(B)). After a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, "4" pattern) temporarily stops in the left area (t3 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(C)). After that, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, "2" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the right area (t4 in FIG. 57, (D) in FIG. 58). Furthermore, after that, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, "4" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the middle area (t5 in FIG. 57, (E) in FIG. 58). As a result, three decorative patterns 55 ("442") suggesting a failure are displayed. A combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a blue chance eye. While the decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in the left area, right area, and middle area, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

When the look-ahead chance number is displayed, a look-ahead chance number lighting effect is performed. That is, after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, at the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, or just before the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, three decorative patterns 55 A look-ahead chance light emitting effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(F)). Specifically, an effect image 91 for emphasizing each pattern is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 so that the three decorative patterns 55 emit light. The effect image 91 may be an image displayed around each decorative pattern 55, an image superimposed in front of each decorative pattern 55, or displayed behind each decorative pattern 55. It may be an image displayed on the At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 are in a mode with characters in which characters are added to number patterns, and are in a mode of "medium" size. While the look-ahead chance eye light emitting performance for the three decorative patterns 55 is performed, each decorative pattern 55 may be momentarily enlarged and displayed more than each decorative pattern when the non-reaching light emitting performance is performed. In this case, each decorative pattern 55 is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emitting effect in the above-described winning light emitting effect. Further, each decorative pattern 55 in the look-ahead chance light emitting effect may be displayed larger than the decorative pattern during the second light emitting effect in the winning light emitting effect. Note that the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the look-ahead chance lighting effect.

The effect image 91 differs according to the type of decorative pattern 55 to be stopped. Specifically, when a blue chance eye (for example, "442") is displayed, a bluish effect image 91 is displayed. Also, when a green chance eye (for example, "115") is displayed, a greenish effect image 91 is displayed. Also, when a red chance eye (for example, "337") is displayed, a reddish effect image 91 is displayed. The effect image 91 used for the look-ahead chance lighting effect includes the effect image for the hit lighting effect (the effect image 61 used for the first light emitting effect and the effect image 62 used for the second light emitting effect), and the effect image 62 for the non-reach light emitting effect. This image is different from the image used and the image used for the ready-to-reach light effect.

Further, when a look-ahead chance number is displayed, a lamp lighting effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a manner suggesting a look-ahead chance number. The look-ahead chance light emission effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the lamp light emission effect performed using the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are interlocked. In this lamp emission effect, the effect means capable of emitting light emits light in a color indicating the level of reliability (specifically, the same color as the color of the foreseeing chance). Specifically, when the blue chance eye is displayed, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit blue light at the timing when the look-ahead chance eye light emission production relating to the blue chance eye is performed. done. Further, when a green chance eye is displayed, a lamp light emission performance in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit green light is performed at the timing when the look-ahead chance eye light emission performance relating to the green chance eye is performed. Further, when a red chance eye is displayed, a lamp light emission performance in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit red light is performed at the timing of performing the look-ahead chance eye light emission performance relating to the red chance eye.

That is, when the look-ahead chance number is displayed, the look-ahead chance light emission effect and the lamp light-up effect related to the look-ahead chance number are performed in conjunction with each other.

After the look-ahead chance light emitting effect is executed, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 are actually stopped (t7 in FIG. 57, (G) in FIG. 58). When the three decorative patterns 55 are actually stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed, and the look-ahead chance light emitting effect is finished. Since the effect image 91 is displayed before the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 and is not displayed when the decorative pattern 55 is fully stopped, the player can be emphasized for the read-ahead chance and the decoration at the time of the main stop. The visibility of the pattern 55 can be prevented from being hindered. When the look-ahead chance light emission effect ends, the lamp light effect also ends. Even after the look-ahead chance light emission effect ends, the corresponding lamp light emission effect may be continued. That is, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may continue emitting blue light even when the three decorative symbols are actually stopped (when the first special symbol is stopped). In this case, the lamp lighting effect related to the look-ahead chance eye may end when the next fluctuation starts. At the timing when the three decorative symbols 55 are fully stopped (the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed), the three small symbols 56 are also fully stopped.

Next, the first special symbol determination relating to Reservation 2 is performed, the variation of the first special symbol is started, and the three decorative symbols 55 are varied (t8 in FIG. 57, (H) in FIG. 58). Regarding the hold 2, similarly to the above, the left symbol is stopped (t9 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(I)), and further the right symbol is stopped (t10 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(J)).

Furthermore, after that, the medium symbols are stopped (t11 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(K)). At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be "155" in order from the left. A combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a green chance eye.

After the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, or at the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, or just before the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, there is a chance to look ahead to three decorative patterns 55. - 特許庁An eye light effect is performed (t12 in FIG. 57, (L) in FIG. 59). Specifically, a greenish effect image 91 for emphasizing each pattern is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 so that the three decorative patterns 55 emit green light. Further, in conjunction with this look-ahead chance eye lighting effect, a lamp light emitting effect corresponding to the green chance eye is also performed. Specifically, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit green light in response to the green look-ahead chance eye lighting effect. Note that the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect associated with the green chance eye.

Then, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped (t13 in FIG. 57, (M) in FIG. 59). In addition, at the timing when the three decorative patterns 55 are fully stopped, the three small patterns 56 are also fully stopped. When the three decorative patterns 55 are actually stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed, and the look-ahead chance light emitting effect is finished. Furthermore, after that, the change related to hold 3 (change related to the prefetch target) is started (t14 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (N)). When it is determined as a big win in the special symbol determination at the start of this variation, the big win is notified in this variation. In this case, during the winning notification, the above-described winning light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect, second light-emitting effect) is performed.

In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead chance light emitting effect is executed when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the loss variation pattern (HP1 to HP3) is selected, and the ready-to-win variation pattern (RP1 to RP4) is selected. will not be executed in this case.

When the winning notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target, the period from the start (or end) of the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and / or second light emitting effect) to the actual stop of the decorative pattern 55 (decoration The swinging period of the pattern 55) is the period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect performed in the fluctuation before the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target to the actual stop of the decorative pattern 55 (the swing period of the decorative pattern 55). dynamic period: for example, the period from time t6 to t7, the period from time t12 to t13). Note that the relationship between these swing periods may be reversed, or may be the same. That is, when the hit notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the prefetch target, the period from the start (or end) of the hit light emitting effect to the actual stop of the decorative pattern 55 (the swing period of the decorative pattern 55) is related to the prefetch target. It may be shorter than or equal to the period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance light emitting effect performed in the previous variation to the actual stop of the decorative pattern 55 .

Further, when the hit notification is performed in the change related to the prefetch target, the execution time of the winning light effect (first light effect and/or the second light effect) is performed in the change before the change related to the prefetch target. Although the execution time of the look-ahead chance lighting effect is shorter than the execution time of the look-ahead chance lighting effect, the reliability of the hit lighting effect (the first lighting effect and/or the second lighting effect) is the highest reliability. (look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect related to red chance eye). Note that the relationship between these execution periods may be reversed, or may be the same. That is, when the winning notification is performed in the variation related to the look-ahead target, the execution time of the winning light-emitting effect may be longer than the execution time of the look-ahead chance light-up effect performed in the variation before the change related to the look-ahead target. and may be the same.

In addition, there are a plurality of aspects with different degrees of reliability for the look-ahead chance eye lighting effect (a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect associated with the blue chance eye, a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect associated with the green chance eye, and a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect associated with the red chance eye). However, there may be one aspect of the winning light effect (first light effect and/or second light effect). Further, the look-ahead chance light emission effect may have a plurality of modes with different degrees of reliability, and the win light emission effect may have a plurality of modes (with the same reliability).

In addition, in the above-mentioned look-ahead chance number, the color of each decorative pattern constituting the look-ahead chance number corresponds (same) to the color associated with the look-ahead chance number light emitting effect, but each decorative pattern is not classified by color. may In this case, the mode of the look-ahead chance light emitting effect may be changed according to the color of the effect image added to each decorative pattern, and the reliability may be suggested by the color. For example, when the “2” pattern and the “4” pattern are white and the “442” chance eye is displayed, by displaying a blue or green effect image around each decorative pattern, A green-tinged look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect may be executed.

In addition, the look-ahead chance light emitting effect is not limited to the aspect of displaying an effect image around each decorative pattern. It may be a mode to change to.

In the above description, when the look-ahead chance number is displayed, the decorative symbols in the left area, right area, and middle area are stopped in order, but the order in which the decorative symbols are stopped is not limited to this. Further, even when the decorative symbols of the left area, the right area, and the middle area are stopped at the same time, the look-ahead chance eye may be temporarily stopped, and the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect may be performed.

In the above description, the three decorative patterns 55 constitute the prefetching chance number, but one or two decorative patterns 55 may constitute the prefetching chance number. Further, the look-ahead chance eyes may be configured using not only numbers but also symbols with letters. Further, in the above description, the decorative symbols constituting the pre-reading chance eye are the decorative symbols of the same classification, but any decorative design may be used to display the pre-reading chance eye. In this case, regardless of the type of the decorative pattern 55 to be stopped, when the look-ahead chance lighting effect (effect image 91) is executed, it becomes a look-ahead chance.

Further, in the above description, the case of displaying the second chance to look-ahead in the normal game state has been described, but the second chance to look-ahead may also be displayed in the variable probability game state and/or the time saving game state.

As described above, even when the look-ahead chance eye based on the result of the preliminary determination is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect for the decorative pattern 55 is performed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest.

Next, a chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big win in the current variation of special symbols will be described. A chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the current variation of the special symbol is referred to as a "pertinent chance eye".

The chance eye is an effect of temporarily stopping a combination of a specific decorative pattern or a specific pattern (specific image) in one variation of the special pattern. For example, the chance eye may be a specific combination of three decorative symbols 55 with numbers (for example, "123", "456", etc.). Further, the chance eye may be an effect in which one specific symbol (specific image) is displayed. For example, the specific symbol (specific image) may be an image written with "NEXT" or "Continue" suggesting a pseudo-fluctuation effect (pseudo-continuation).

Even when the chance eye is displayed, a lighting effect (hereinafter referred to as “the chance eye lighting effect”) for the decorative symbols (images) forming the chance eye is performed. In the following, a description will be given of the chance eye lighting effect when the image suggesting a pseudo-run is stopped as the chance eye. Here, the lighting effect for the pattern (image) suggesting the pseudo-continuous is sometimes referred to as "pseudo-continuous lighting effect".

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect when a NEXT symbol suggesting a pseudo run is displayed in the normal game state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the three decorative symbols 55 start to fluctuate (FIG. 61(A)). When a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the left area (FIG. 61(B)), and then the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the right area (FIG. 61(C)). Next, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting a pseudo-run moves downward in the middle region, and a pseudo-run fanning effect is performed to make players expect a pseudo-run (FIG. 61(D)). Then, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting that a pseudo-run will be performed is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the fact that a pseudo-run will be performed is notified (FIG. 61(E)).

For example, in the pseudo-running effect, an image written with "NEXT" suggesting a pseudo-run and a decorative pattern 55 with numbers written are variably displayed in the middle area that is the display area of the decorative pattern 55. is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle region. In this case, an image written as "NEXT" may be displayed superimposed on the numerical decorative pattern 55 displayed in the middle area. Alternatively, in the pseudo-continuous effect, an image written as "NEXT" is translucently displayed or moved in the display areas of the three decorative patterns 55 including the left area, the middle area, and the right area. may Then, when the image written "NEXT" is displayed in the three display areas (when the translucent image changes to a clear image, or when the moving image is displayed temporarily), a pseudo It is notified that the reunion will be held.

At this time, a pseudo-continuous light effect is performed in which the "NEXT" symbol is lighted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(E), an effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol to highlight the "NEXT" symbol. Note that the effect image 92 may be superimposed and displayed in front of or behind the "NEXT" pattern. This effect image 92 includes the effect images 61 and 62 in the above-described win light emission effect, the effect image 91 used in the chance eye light emission effect related to the look-ahead chance eye, and other light emission effects (reach light emission) for decorative patterns performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is an image different from the effect image used for production, light emission production during non-reach). It should be noted that the effect image 92 of a color suggesting high or low reliability (for example, any one of blue, green, red, or zebra suggesting the possibility of a big win, or rainbow color suggesting a big win) by means of the pseudo-continuous lighting effect. may be displayed. For example, the color of the effect image 92 may be uniquely determined corresponding to the number of pseudo-runs, or may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130 .

Further, as shown in the figure, the left and right decorative patterns 55 that had been displayed until immediately before may be hidden, and an image suggesting that a pseudo-run will be performed may be displayed on the entire screen. During the pseudo-continuous lighting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 may be temporarily stopped while being superimposed behind the "NEXT" pattern, or may be changed at high speed (or low speed). In conjunction with this pseudo-continuous lighting effect, a lamp lighting effect is also performed. The lamp lighting effects corresponding to this pseudo-continuous lighting effect are the lamp lighting effects corresponding to the above-mentioned hit lighting effects, the lamp lighting effects corresponding to the look-ahead chance eyes, the lamp lighting corresponding to the reach lighting effects, and the non-reach lighting effects. It is a different effect from the corresponding lamp emission. In the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous light effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a color corresponding to the pseudo continuous light effect suggesting the pseudo continuous light effect. In addition, depending on the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous light effect, a color that suggests high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra that suggests the possibility of a big hit. Or a rainbow that suggests a big hit. color), the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may emit light. This color may be uniquely determined corresponding to the pseudo-continuous light effect, or may be determined by the effect control unit 130 by random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination.

It should be noted that, when the pseudo-continuation is not performed, as a result of the pseudo-continuation stimulus effect, the "NEXT" symbol is not temporarily stopped (the image written as "NEXT" is not temporarily stopped and displayed), and the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous lighting effect is performed. is not performed.

After the image suggesting that the pseudo-ream will be performed is displayed, the three decorative designs 55 change again (Fig. 61(F)). At this time, a pseudo number image 93 is displayed, for example, in the upper left area of the screen. The pseudo-number image 93 is an image showing the number of pseudo-runs, and in the case of the first re-variation (“pseudo-2”), an image written as “×2” is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the first re-fluctuation, the "NEXT" symbol may be temporarily stopped (FIG. 61(G)). This notifies that the second re-variation (“pseudo 3”) will be performed. Also at this time, the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" pattern.

Then, the second re-variation (“pseudo 3”) is performed, and the pseudo number image 93 changes to “x3” (FIG. 61(H)). After that, the decorative patterns 55 of the same kind are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides to establish a ready-to-win state (FIG. 61(I)), and a ready-to-win effect is performed. Since the production proceeds in the same manner as described above, the explanation will be omitted.

Here, unlike the "1" to "9" symbols, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting a pseudo-run is neither a symbol with a number nor a symbol used at the time of winning notification. However, the "NEXT" pattern is an image that is variably displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern 55 with numbers in the area where the decorative pattern 55 fluctuates. It makes the player expect (guess) the result of the special symbol determination. Therefore, the “NEXT” pattern can be regarded as a kind of decorative pattern 55 . It can be said that the quasi-continuous lighting effect that is performed with the temporary stop of the "NEXT" symbol is the lighting effect for the decorative symbol. The "NEXT" pattern may be an image different from the decorative pattern.

Note that FIG. 61 describes an example in which an image suggesting a pseudo-run is displayed after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area. It may be displayed after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in at least one of the middle areas.

Further, an image suggesting a pseudo run may be displayed even if the decorative pattern 55 does not temporarily stop in any of the left region, the right region, and the middle region. In this case, after the image suggesting a pseudo-run is displayed (temporarily stopped), the number of pseudo-runs indicated by the pseudo-run image 93 is increased by "1". In other words, even if none of the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped, a pseudo-continuation is performed, suggesting that the current variation will continue.

In addition, the production shown in FIG. 61 is performed in the normal game state, but the pseudo-continuous and pseudo-continuous light emission effects may be performed in the variable probability game state and/or the time reduction game state.

In addition, in FIG. 61, a case where a pseudo-run is performed has been described, but a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, "1", "2", and "3" patterns) suggesting development of a specific effect. In the same way, when the chance eye composed of a regular eye and a reach-losing eye) is displayed, the chance eye light emitting effect corresponding to the chance eye may be performed for each decorative symbol. For example, the specific effect may be an effect that makes the player expect the "7" symbols to stop. Incidentally, the combination of specific decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped during the pre-ready-win effect, or may be temporarily stopped after the ready-win game is established.

In addition, decorative patterns that suggest a specific production, for example, a development pattern that suggests development to a reach production (for example, an image written as “development”), have a relatively high reliability (around 10%) A suggestive chance symbol (for example, an image written as "chance") and a hot design suggesting that the reliability is 50% or more (for example, an image written as "hot heat") are temporarily stopped. good too. These images, like the "NEXT" symbols, are also images that are variably displayed in the area where the decorative symbols 55 fluctuate. It makes you expect (guess) the result. Therefore, these images can also be regarded as a kind of decorative design. Even when these images (decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped, a light emission effect may be performed for the temporarily stopped image.

Further, in the above description, when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern is illuminated. For example, when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode, the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and/or second light emitting effect) is performed before the decorative pattern 55 is finally stopped. When the decorative pattern 55 is used to display the look-ahead chance eye, when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a lost mode, the look-ahead chance light emission effect is performed before the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped. rice field. In this embodiment, based on the result of the special design determination or the preliminary determination, even when the decorative design 55 starts to fluctuate, the lighting effect for the decorative design 55 (lighting effect at the start) may be performed. The light-emitting effect at the start may be executed in the variation in which the winning light-emitting effect is performed, may be performed in the variation in which the winning light-emitting effect is not performed, or may be performed in the variation in which the look-ahead chance number is displayed. Alternatively, it may be performed in a variation in which the look-ahead chance number is not displayed. The light-emitting effect at the start is different from the winning light-emitting effect and the look-ahead chance light-emitting effect, and is colored in a color that suggests the level of reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra, which suggests the possibility of a big win). Alternatively, it is an effect in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light (rainbow color suggesting a big win). For example, in the light emitting effect at the start, a red effect image may be displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 55 when the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate. The light-emitting effect at the start is a effect suggesting the degree of reliability in the current variation of the special symbol, and the light-emitting color of the decorative pattern 55 in the light-emitting effect at the start may suggest the degree of reliability in the variation. While the light-emitting effect at the start and the look-ahead chance light-emitting effect have a plurality of effect modes (red, green, etc.), the winning light-emitting effect may have one effect mode.

In the variation in which the winning light-emitting effect is performed, the start-time light-emitting effect may be easily performed at the start of the variation. In other words, when the light emitting performance at the start is executed immediately after the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the light emitting performance may be more easily performed in the variation of the special pattern than when the light emitting performance at the start is not executed. Further, when the winning light-emitting effect is performed in the variation, the light-emitting effect at the start may be executed more easily at the start of the variation than when the look-ahead chance light-emitting effect is performed in the variation. Further, when the light-emitting effect at the start is executed, the look-ahead chance light-emitting effect may be performed in the variation.

As described above, even when the chance eye is displayed based on the result of the special symbol determination, the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the amusement.

Comparing the size of each image related to each of the light emission effects in this embodiment, effect image 82, effect image 62, effect image 64, non-reach light emission effect image 70, effect image 91, effect image 80, effect image 92 , effect image 60, effect image 63, and effect image 61 are larger in this order. Note that the reach line image 81 is longer in the horizontal direction (longitudinal direction) than any of the above images. The reach line image 81 is at least shorter than the effect images 60 , 61 , 63 , 80 and at least longer than the effect image 82 in the vertical direction (lateral direction).

In the present embodiment, when the display positions of the respective images related to the respective light emitting effects are compared with respect to the vertical direction (lateral direction) of the liquid crystal screen 5, the following relationship may be obtained. Specifically, for example, the upper ends of the effect images 60 , 61 , 63 , 70 and 80 are located above the upper ends of the effect images 62 and 64 and the upper end of the reach line image 81 . Also, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, and 80 may be positioned above the upper end of the effect image 80, or may be the same. Also, for example, the effect image 82 is positioned above the reach line image 81 . Further, for example, the upper end of the non-reach light emission effect image 70 and the upper ends of the effect images 91 and 92 may be positioned below the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70 and 80, or may be positioned above may be located.

Each image (specifically, the effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, and 92, and the reach line image 81) related to each light emission effect may be erased entirely at once, or partially erased. The time until it is erased may differ depending on the For example, the images may scatter radially from the central portion of the image, and the contour portions may remain here and there on the liquid crystal screen 5 even after the central portion has disappeared (for example, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed superimposed on the front side of ). Further, each of the images may be erased while the shape of the contour changes so discontinuously that the contour cannot be clearly expressed (partially may be interrupted). Further, each of the images may be erased after the contour cannot be clearly represented due to, for example, a change in transmittance from the vicinity of the contour toward the contour.

Next, a swinging period of the decorative pattern 55 after execution of the above-described look-ahead chance light-emitting effect, ready-to-win light-emitting effect, and hit light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect and/or second light-emitting effect) will be described.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of the decorative pattern 55 when the look-ahead chance light emission effect, the ready-to-win light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, after the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect is carried out, the three decorative symbols 55 are kept until the actual stop of the three decorative symbols 55. swing. Specifically, the effect control unit 130, when receiving a variation stop command from the game control unit 100, makes the three decorative symbols 55 actually stop on the liquid crystal screen 5. FIG. After that, when a variation start command is received at the start of variation of the next special symbol, the effect control section 130 starts variation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(B), when the ready-to-win effect is performed, after the ready-to-win light emitting effect is performed in response to establishment of the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern 55 swings for a predetermined period. Specifically, during the ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns 55 swing, and the middle area decorative patterns 55 fluctuate at high speed. Then, as a result of the ready-to-win performance, whether or not a big win is notified, and after the three decorative patterns 55 swing for a predetermined period, the three decorative patterns 55 are finally stopped in response to a change stop command from the game control unit 100. do. After that, when a variation start command is received at the start of variation of the next special symbol, the effect control section 130 starts variation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Also, as shown in FIG. 62(C), when the winning notification is performed, after the winning light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 swing, and according to the variation stop command from the game control unit 100, The three decorative patterns 55 are finally stopped. After that, an opening command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130 . The effect control unit 130 executes an opening effect based on the opening command, receives a round start command from the game control unit 100, and executes a jackpot effect. Next, the effect control unit 130 receives an ending command from the game control unit 100 at the end of the jackpot game, and performs an ending effect. Then, the performance control unit 130 receives a variation start command based on the next special symbol determination from the game control unit 100, executes a variation performance for varying the decorative symbol 55 based on the variation start command, and responds to the variation. A variation stop command is received from the game control unit 100, and the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped.

When the production control unit 130 normally receives the command from the game control unit 100, the swing period FT1 of the decorative pattern 55 after the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance light emission production and the reach light emission production start (or Comparing the swinging period FT2 of the decorative pattern 55 after the end of the win and the swinging period FT3 of the decorative pattern 55 after the start (or end) of the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect or second light emitting effect) , FT1<FT3<FT2. These relationships may be FT3<FT1<FT2.

On the other hand, when the production control unit 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control unit 100, the relationship between the swing periods may change.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of decorative symbols when the effect control section 130 does not normally receive commands from the game control section 100. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the variation in which the look-ahead chance eyes are executed, the command (variation stop command or the next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 is not normally received by the production control unit 130 , the oscillation period FT1 becomes FT1'. Specifically, when the fluctuation stop command is not received after the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are displayed in the next command from the game control unit 100 (the fluctuation stop command related to the next fluctuation ) is received.

Also, as shown in FIG. 63(B), in the variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the command (variation stop command or the next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 is not normally received by the effect control unit 130. In this case, the oscillation period FT2 is FT2'. Specifically, when the change stop command is not received after the ready-to-win effect is executed, the decorative pattern 55 receives the next command (change stop command relating to the next change) from the game control unit 100. swing until

Also, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), in the variation in which the hit notification is executed, the command (variation stop command or the next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 is not normally received by the effect control unit 130 In this case, the oscillation period FT3 is FT3'. Specifically, when the variation stop command is not received after the winning light emitting effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are set to the next command (the next command) from the game control unit 100 after the big winning game It oscillates until it receives a fluctuation stop command related to fluctuation.

The relationship between the lengths of these oscillation periods FT1', FT2', and FT3' is FT1'<FT2'<FT3'.

That is, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100 . A game control unit 100 includes special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on establishment of a starting condition, and variable display of predetermined identification information based on the determination result of the special game determination means. identification information display means for stop-displaying after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, a variation start command indicating the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information, and a variation stop command indicating the stop of variation of the predetermined identification information; and command transmission means capable of transmitting to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has command receiving means capable of receiving commands transmitted from the command transmitting means, and can display decorative symbol images and predetermined game effects accompanying changes in the identification information. The predetermined game effect includes a ready-to-win effect to expect the special game to be performed by setting the decorative pattern image to a ready-to-win state, and a ready-to-win light-emitting effect for the decorative pattern image that is executed when the ready-to-win state is established. , and a winning light emitting effect for the decorative design image which is executed when the ready-to-win effect is finished and the decorative design is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating execution of the special game. A first swing time (FT2) of the decorative pattern from when the ready-to-win light effect is executed to when the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command of the change in which the ready-to-win light emitting effect is executed). , a second swing time (FT3) of the decorative pattern from when the winning light-emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command of the variation in which the winning light-emitting effect is executed); longer than Further, after the ready-to-reach light emission effect is executed, the command receiving means does not receive a predetermined command (variation stop command of the change in which the ready-to-reach light emission effect is executed), and the next predetermined command (the variation stop command) The third swing time (FT2') of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives the next fluctuation stop command) is a predetermined command (the winning light emission effect is executed) after the winning light effect is executed. The command receiving means does not receive the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation that has been changed), and the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command following the fluctuation stop command). It is shorter than 4 swing times (FT3').

The gaming machine of this embodiment also includes a game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100 . A game control unit 100 includes special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on establishment of a starting condition, and variable display of predetermined identification information based on the determination result of the special game determination means. identification information display means for stop-displaying after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, a variation start command indicating the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information, and a variation stop command indicating the stop of variation of the predetermined identification information; and command transmission means capable of transmitting to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has command receiving means capable of receiving commands transmitted from the command transmitting means, and can display decorative symbol images and predetermined game effects accompanying changes in the identification information. The predetermined game effect displays the decorative pattern image in a predetermined manner (a look-ahead chance aspect) to make the user expect that the special game will be played based on the judgment result of the special game judging means later. Pre-determination effect (pre-reading chance eye), pre-reading chance light emission effect for the decorative symbol image executed along with the pre-determination effect, and determination by the special game determination means after the pre-determination effect is completed and a winning light emitting effect for the decorative design image executed when the decorative design is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating execution of the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be played. A fifth swing time of the decorative pattern from when the look-ahead chance light-emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command of the variation in which the look-ahead chance-light light effect is performed). (FT1) is the second oscillation of the decorative pattern from when the winning light-emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command for the variation in which the winning light-emitting effect is executed); shorter (or may be longer) than the time (FT3). Further, after the look-ahead chance light emission effect is executed, the command receiving means does not receive a predetermined command (variation stop command of the change in which the look-ahead chance light emission effect is executed), and the next predetermined command (the The sixth swing time (FT1') of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives the variation stop command following the variation stop command) is a predetermined command (the winning Until the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command following the fluctuation stop command) without the command receiving means receiving the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the light emitting effect is executed) It is shorter than the fourth swing time (FT3') of the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that a zone effect that makes the player expect a big win may be executed over the variable display of one or a plurality of special symbols. The zone production is a production that suggests whether or not there is a big hit in the right of special design determination that is currently reserved (fluctuation of the special design related to the reservation). For example, when the game ball wins the start opening during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the right of special symbol determination is reserved, and the determination (preliminary determination) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed with respect to the right. Zone production is performed based on the result of the prior determination. For example, in the zone effect, an effect image of color suggesting the degree of reliability is displayed on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5, or a belt-shaped image displaying the name of the zone effect is displayed on both the left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5. . In the zone production, the background image is switched to a special image, or a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears, so that the player can recognize that the zone production is being executed. good.

When the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, there are cases where the light-emitting effect during the non-reach, the light-emitting effect during the reach, and the light-emitting effect for the chance eye are executed. The effect image related to the zone effect may overlap the effect image related to each of the light emitting effects. Therefore, the visibility of the effect image associated with each light emitting effect may be lowered by the effect image associated with the zone effect.

On the other hand, even when the effect image related to the zone production is displayed, at least the small pattern 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth patterns 57, 59 are not affected by the effect image, and the small pattern 56, the reserved number 52, and the The fourth patterns 57 and 59 do not become invisible and the visibility does not deteriorate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the zone effect is not executed while the winning light emitting effect is being executed. When the winning light-emitting effect is executed, the zone effect ends before the winning light-emitting effect starts (for example, when the winning effect starts).

In this embodiment, there are zone effects A and zone effects B in the zone effects. The fact that the zone effect A is performed indicates that the degree of expectation for a big win is "medium" (for example, 10% to 20%) in the next and subsequent special symbol variations. For example, zone production A is sometimes executed when it is determined to be a big hit in the preliminary judgment, but in the preliminary judgment, the fluctuation pattern for a loss with a slightly longer fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, the SP reach production) It is an effect that is likely to be executed when the variation pattern) is determined.

The zone performance B is a performance with a higher degree of expectation than the zone performance A. - 特許庁For example, the zone effect B is a effect that is likely to be executed when a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect) is determined in advance determination. Zone performance B is more likely to be executed in response to a big win than in the case where the result of prior determination is a loss. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fact that the zone effect B is performed indicates that the degree of expectation for a big win is "high" (for example, 40% to 50%) in the fluctuation of the special symbols after the next.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a case where the zone effect is promoted to the zone effect B via the zone effect A. For example, while the zone effect A is being executed, as a effect suggesting promotion to the zone effect B, for example, the characters "I don't like this" may be displayed on the full screen. A zone effect B may be started along with the erasure of the characters.

In addition, the zone production is performed based on the result of the special symbol determination, and may be an effect suggesting the result of the special symbol determination. In this case, the zone effect is started during the variable display of the special symbols and ends during the variable display of the special symbols.

[Timer interrupt processing by effect control unit 130]
Next, details of effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69. FIG.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control section 130. As shown in FIG. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control section 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. Part or all of the processing shown in FIGS.

Effect control unit 130 (CPU 131 of) first executes command reception processing (step S1001). The command reception process of step S1001 is a process of controlling effects based on various commands from the game control unit 100. FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and transmits the determined effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command to be executed is generated and set in the RAM 133 . Details of the command reception processing in step S1001 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs command transmission processing for transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command for starting the variable effect set in the process of step S1001 and a command for ending the variable effect are transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 . As a result, the image sound control unit 140 performs image display, audio output, etc., and the lamp control unit 150 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7, the lighting of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, the control of the production button 26, and the like. done.

Following the processing of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes transfer processing (step S1003). Specifically, when receiving a control command from the image sound control unit 140 , the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150 . For example, the control commands from the image sound control unit 140 include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the production button 26, and a control command for executing each lamp lighting production described above. etc. Also, when receiving a control command from the lamp control unit 150 , the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image sound control unit 140 . Control commands from the lamp control unit 150 include control commands indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated. Control commands are transmitted and received between the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, so that the movable accessory 7 is synchronized with the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It operates, an image is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 26, and a lamp light effect in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light is executed.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, command reception processing executed in the effect control section 130 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG.

First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not a pending command transmitted from the game control unit 100 is received (step S1301). When it determines with having received the pending|holding command (step S1301: YES), the production|presentation control part 130 performs a pending|holding command process (step S1302). Details of the pending command process will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the pending command is not received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the variation start command is received (step S1303 ).

When the fluctuation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control section 130 executes the fluctuation start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the production control unit 130 determines the contents of the fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the received fluctuation start command, and the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 Generate a command to execute a variable effect. The command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variable effect is executed. Details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the variation stop command is received (step S1305).

When the fluctuation stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the fluctuation stop command process (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 . As a result, for example, the decorative pattern 51 that is being variably displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal screen 5 is actually stopped, and the variable effect is completed.

When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command is received (step S1307 ).

When an opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes opening processing (step S1308). Specifically, the performance control unit 130 determines the opening performance based on the opening command transmitted when a big win is won, and causes the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening performance.

When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command is not received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command is received (step S1309). .

When an ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes ending processing (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed, or when it is determined that the ending command is not received (step S1309: NO), the effect control section 130 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Reservation command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of pending command processing in step 1302 of FIG. The effect control unit 130 first updates the number of pending special symbol determination stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reserves of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. When it does, it updates to the value which added "1" to the number of reservations of the 2nd special design decision.

Next, the effect control unit 130 acquires the prior determination information included in the received pending command (step S1321).

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination information (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the display mode of the pending icon 51 to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than usual, and the scenario of the change, as the preliminary determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not to change the pending icon 51 related to the winning to the start opening this time to a mode with a high degree of expectation at the time of winning, or whether or not to change in the next and subsequent special symbol variations.

In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to display the look-ahead chance eye as the pre-determination effect. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 executes the effect of displaying the look-ahead chance eye (look-ahead chance eye effect) in the variation prior to the variation of the special symbol related to the current winning (pre-determination target variation). It decides whether or not to do so, and its period (the number of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance eye). Here, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win effect is performed) is selected in the target variation of the preliminary determination, and a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a ready-to-win effect is performed in the variation before the target variation. variation pattern) is not selected, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance effect by a predetermined lottery.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines a prize winning sound when displaying the pending icon 51 relating to the prize winning to the starting gate this time (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines different winning sounds according to the color of the pending icon 51 determined in step S1322.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets a pending increase command based on the results of the processes of steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image sound control unit 140, the hold icon 51 related to the winning of the start opening this time on the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed in the display mode determined in step S1322, and step The winning sound determined in S1323 is output. Also, in response to this pending increase command, the number indicated by the pending number 52 is increased by "1".

[Variation start command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flow chart of the change start command processing in step 1304 of FIG.

Effect control unit 130 analyzes the received variation start command (step S1340). In this variation start command, the information of the pattern indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (whether it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, etc.), whether the information of this pattern is related to the first special pattern judgment, or the second special pattern Winning start opening information indicating whether or not it relates to the determination, information on the variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. The effect control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not the game is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot and the variation pattern (variation time). Also, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the game state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the variable effect associated with the variable display of the special symbols based on the analysis result (step S1341). Specifically, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the effect control unit 130 determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuation, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the presence or absence of the above-described various light emitting effects, and the mode thereof. etc. Also, when it is determined in step S1322 to execute the look-ahead chance effect as the preliminary determination effect, the effect control unit 130 determines the look-ahead chance effect and the look-ahead chance light emission effect.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130, by performing a lottery using the effect random number, whether or not to perform various advance notice effect, etc. when the variable effect is performed by the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341, and , determine the contents of the announcement effect and the like (step S1342).

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets a variable effect start command for instructing execution of the variable effect according to the effect patterns determined in the processing of steps S1341 and S1342 to the RAM 133 (step S1343). This variable effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 . Thereby, the determined variable effect is executed by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 .

Following the processing of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

[Timer Interrupt Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 140]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control section 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control section 140. FIG. The image sound control unit 140 repeats the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 68 at regular time intervals (for example, 1/60 second) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Execute.

First, the image sound control unit 140 (the CPU 141 thereof) determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). When receiving the variable effect start command, the image sound control unit 140 starts the variable effect according to the content of the variable effect included in the variable effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate on the liquid crystal screen 5, and a fluctuating effect is executed. Also, an animation is displayed in which each pending icon 51 is moved to the right on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the number indicated by the pending number 52 is decreased by "1".

If the process of step S1402 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step S1401, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not an operation command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 has been received (step S1403). . When an operation command is received (step S1403: YES), the image sound control unit 140 controls the variable effect according to the operation command (step S1404). The image sound control unit 140 sets an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid during the variable effect. For example, the validity period is set in the decided effect immediately before the winning notification. When an operation command is received during the validity period, the image sound control section 140 executes an effect according to the operation. For example, in the case of executing the pattern matching effect or the character actuation effect in response to the operation of the effect button 26 in the decision effect, the image sound control unit 140 displays the image related to the pattern matching effect or the character actuation effect according to the operation on the liquid crystal display. Display on screen 5.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1403, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not it is time to execute the lamp lighting effect (step S1405). When it is time to execute the lamp light effect (step S1405: YES), the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for the lamp light effect to the effect control unit 130 (step S1406). This control command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150 via the effect control section 130 .

When the process of step S1406 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1405, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not a command to end the variation effect is received (step S1407). When the variable effect end command is received (step S1407: YES), the image sound control section 140 ends the variable effect (step S1408). Specifically, the image sound control section 140 permanently stops the ornamental pattern 51 swinging on the liquid crystal screen 5 .

In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 68, the image sound control unit 140 performs processing related to a pending command, processing related to an opening effect, processing related to a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, processing related to an ending effect, and the like. As a result, the pending icon 51 is displayed, the opening effect is executed, the jackpot game effect is executed, and the ending effect is executed.

[Lamp Control Processing by Lamp Control Unit 150]
Next, referring to FIG. 69, lamp control processing performed in lamp control unit 150 will be described. FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by the lamp control unit 150. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 69, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not an operation on the effect button 26 has been detected (step S1501). When an operation on the effect button 26 is detected (step S1501: YES), the lamp control section 150 transmits an operation command to the effect control section 130 (step S1502). This operation command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 via the effect control section 130 .

If step S1502 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step S1501, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not a control command related to lamp lighting effects has been received (step S1503). When receiving a control command related to the lamp lighting effect (step S1503: YES), the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp lighting effect (step S1504). The lamp control unit 150 stores a plurality of light emission patterns for causing the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. For example, the lamp control unit 150 has a light emission pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win light emission effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the pattern matching effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the character actuation effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the first light emission effect, and a second light emission effect. , a light emission pattern corresponding to the look-ahead chance light emission effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, and the like are stored. The control command includes information indicating any one of these light emission patterns. The lamp control unit 150 reads a pre-stored light emission pattern in accordance with the received control command, and executes a lamp light effect that causes the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. After receiving the control command, the lamp control unit 150 performs light emission control of the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 based on the light emission pattern stored in advance.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform various light-emitting effects using the decorative symbols during the variable effect, thereby improving the amusement.

[Modification]
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be in the following forms.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed after the SPSP reach effect is performed has been described, but other reach effect (N reach effect, SP reach effect) was performed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed later. Also, when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (eg OP4) is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed, and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (eg OP1) is selected. When selected, at least one of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may not be performed. In addition, even if a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is prepared to perform a performance (direct hit performance) in which the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop in a jackpot mode without performing the ready-to-win performance. good. When the variation pattern for performing this direct hit effect is selected, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may be performed, and at least one of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect It does not have to be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, light emission is performed along with each light emission effect (specifically, hit light emission effect, non-reach light emission effect, first reach pattern light emission effect, reach line effect, chance eye light emission effect). The board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern that can discriminate the type of presentation. In another embodiment, without displaying each image (specifically, effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92) related to each light emission effect, the light emission pattern for each light emission effect Each of the above-described light emitting effects may be realized by emitting light from the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 at .

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display device 5) for displaying the image, and the decorative pattern 55 is illuminated by the image display means. In another embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed not only on the image display means but also on other display means (for example, a 7-segment display capable of displaying the numbers "0" to "9"). may be done.

Further, in another embodiment, a main liquid crystal display device corresponding to the liquid crystal screen 5 of the present embodiment and a sub liquid crystal display device (not shown) may be provided (hereinafter referred to as "main liquid crystal", "sub liquid crystal"). abbreviated as). For example, the sub liquid crystal is an image display device having a smaller display screen than the main liquid crystal. The sub-liquid crystal is configured to be movable with respect to, for example, the game board 2, and the main liquid crystals are arranged in the width direction (horizontal direction with respect to the player), height direction (vertical direction with respect to the player), and oblique directions of the pachinko game machine 1. The front side of the liquid crystal is configured to be movable and rotatable. When the sub-liquid crystal is not in operation, it is arranged in an initial position (for example, on the side of the main liquid crystal) that does not reduce the visibility of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal as much as possible. placed where possible. The front and back surfaces of the sub-liquid crystal are decorated in a predetermined manner, and contain light-emitting elements (not shown) such as LEDs capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Therefore, even when no image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal, the presentation effect can be enhanced. In such a configuration, for example, the effect images 60 to 64 relating to the hit light emission effect, the non-reach light emission effect image 70, the images 80 to 82 relating to the reach light emission effect, and the effect images 91 and 92 relating to the chance light emission effect are displayed. It may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal. The corresponding decorative pattern 55 may be displayed on the main liquid crystal or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. Each of the light emission effects may be executed by causing the sub liquid crystal to emit light in a light emission pattern for each of the light emission effects.

Also, the various values (eg, variation time, probability, etc.) exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Further, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. In addition, the order of processing, set values, thresholds used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

[Structure of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 1, in the case of a big win, the first light emitting effect ( For example, an effect image 61 is displayed), and after the first light emission effect, a second light emission effect (for example, an effect image 62 is displayed) is performed.

Here, ``to perform the first light emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played'' means that the first light emitting effect is displayed while the decorative pattern that suggests a jackpot game is displayed. When performing the light emitting effect, when performing the first light emitting effect at the timing when the decorative pattern suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed, or just before displaying the decorative pattern suggesting that the jackpot game is performed. Including the case where the first light emission effect is performed.

According to this configuration 1, the first light emission performance and the second light emission performance can be performed in a state in which the decorative symbols suggesting the execution of the big win game are displayed before the decorative symbols are actually stopped, and the big win is achieved. A decorative pattern suggesting that a game will be played can be emphasized.

(Configuration 2)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 2, in the case of a big win, a light emitting effect (first At least one of the light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect) is performed. Depending on the game state, there is a case where the light emitting effect is performed and a case where it is not performed.

For example, in the normal game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed, while in the variable probability game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal game state, the first light emission effect is executed but the second light emission effect is executed. It is not necessary to execute the lighting effect. Also, in the variable probability gaming state, the second light emitting effect is executed, but the first light emitting effect does not have to be executed.

According to this configuration 2, when displaying a decorative symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, it is possible not to execute the light emitting effect in the probability variable game state, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emission effect from being repeated in a relatively short period of time, thereby preventing the player from getting bored.

(Composition 3)
In the case of a big win, the gaming machine according to configuration 3 performs the first light emitting effect when displaying decorative symbols (for example, matching symbols) suggesting that a big win game will be played before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. After performing the first light emitting effect, the second light emitting effect is performed. The decorative patterns include a plurality of types of patterns including a first pattern (for example, an odd number pattern) and a second pattern (for example, an even number pattern) different from the first pattern. When a first pattern (a set of '3' patterns) is displayed to suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a first light emission performance and a second light emission performance are performed, and a jackpot game is suggested to be performed. When displaying the second pattern ("4" pattern pattern matching), there are cases where the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed.

According to this configuration 3, even when the first symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is played is displayed, and even when the second symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is played is displayed, the first light emission is performed. A performance and a second light-emitting performance can be performed, and a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be performed can be emphasized.

(Composition 4)
In the case of a big win, the game machine according to the configuration 4 performs a light-emitting performance when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a big win game will be played before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern includes a first pattern (for example, a pattern with any number from "1" to "9") and a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, with a number). There are multiple types of symbols, including special symbols that are not included). When displaying a first pattern (symbols of number patterns) suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a first light effect and/or a second light effect when the patterns are aligned) is performed. , When displaying a second pattern (special pattern) that suggests that a jackpot game is performed, a light emission effect different from the predetermined light emission effect (for example, the first light emission effect and / or the second light effect when the special symbol is stopped) lighting effect).

According to this configuration 4, the light emission differs between when the first symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is played is displayed and when the second symbol suggesting the jackpot game is displayed. A production can be performed, the production can be diversified, and interest can be improved.

(Composition 5)
The gaming machine according to configuration 5 has a plurality of jackpots including, as jackpot games, a first jackpot game (4R normal jackpot) and a second jackpot game (10R variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game. A game can be executed. When the first jackpot game is performed, when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that the first jackpot game is performed before the special pattern is stopped and displayed (4R normal jackpot is determined in the variable probability game state In the case where irregular patterns are displayed), the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are not performed. When the second jackpot game is performed, first light emission is performed when decorative patterns suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game (symbols of "7" patterns) are displayed until the special patterns are stopped and displayed. An effect is performed, and after the first light emission effect, a second light emission effect is performed.

According to this configuration 5, for example, when winning a disadvantageous jackpot that shifts to a normal game state, a decorative pattern suggesting that the first jackpot game will be played is displayed, and the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed. When an advantageous jackpot is won without execution, a decoration pattern suggesting that a second jackpot game is played is displayed, and the first light emission performance and the second light emission performance can be executed.

(Composition 6)
The gaming machine according to configuration 6 displays decorative symbols (e.g., foreseeing chance eyes, relevant chance eyes (specific symbol combination , temporary stop of pseudo-continuous symbols, development symbols, etc.)), it is possible to perform a predetermined light-emitting effect (for example, a look-ahead chance light-emitting effect, a pseudo-continuous light-emitting effect, etc.). In the case of a big hit, a specific light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect and/or Or the second lighting effect) is performed.

According to this configuration 6, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner not suggesting that a big winning game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner suggesting that a big winning game will be played. When it is done, a specific lighting effect is performed. As a result, even when the big winning game is not performed, the player can be expected to expect it, and the amusement can be improved.

(Composition 7)
The gaming machine according to configuration 7 provides a predetermined light-emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a chance eye) in a manner that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being played and does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played. (For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance lighting effect). In the case of a big hit, a specific light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect and/or Or the second lighting effect) is performed. The time from the end of a predetermined light emission effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern is different from the time from the end of a specific light emission effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern.

According to this configuration 7, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner not suggesting that a big winning game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner suggesting that a big winning game will be played. When it is done, a specific lighting effect is performed. The period from the end of the predetermined light emitting effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern is different from the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern. For example, when the period from the end of a specific light emitting effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern is longer than the period from the end of the predetermined light emitting effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern, the specific light emitting effect is executed longer. and the player can have a sense of satisfaction with the performance of the jackpot game. Further, when the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern is shorter, the specific light emitting effect is performed in a short time, and the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

(Composition 8)
The gaming machine according to configuration 8 provides a predetermined light emission effect ( For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance lighting effect). In the case of a big hit, a specific light emitting effect (first light emitting effect in the winning light emitting effect) is displayed when a decorative pattern (for example, a set of symbols) is displayed to suggest that the special pattern is stopped and displayed. and/or a second light emitting effect). The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of the specific light emission effect are different.

According to this configuration 8, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner not suggesting that a big winning game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner suggesting that a big winning game will be played. When it is done, a specific lighting effect is performed. The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of the specific light emission effect are different. For example, when the execution time of a specific light-emitting effect is longer than the execution time of a predetermined light-emitting effect, the specific light-emitting effect can be executed for a longer period of time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction with the performance of the jackpot game. I can hold you. Further, when the execution time of the specific light emission effect is shorter, the specific light emission effect is performed in a short time, and the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

(Composition 9)
The gaming machine according to configuration 9 displays decorative symbols (for example, temporary stop ), and the second mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIG. 24 (N)) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. A second light emission effect that is executed when displaying (for example, temporarily stopping) can be executed.

According to this configuration 9, when informing that the big winning game is to be executed, the first light emitting effect is executed when the decorative symbols of the first mode are displayed before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second mode is performed. The second light emitting effect is executed when the decorative pattern of is displayed. As a result, the light emitting effect is executed twice with different modes of the decorative symbols, so that the impression of the light emitting effect can be made different and the player can be prevented from becoming bored.

(Configuration 10)
The gaming machine according to configuration 10 is executed when displaying (e.g., temporarily stopping) decorative symbols in a manner (e.g., matching symbols) informing that a jackpot game is to be performed during variable display of special symbols. A light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect can be executed. The execution time differs between the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect (for example, the first light emitting effect is executed at a timing earlier than the second light emitting effect. Also, the length of time required for the first light emitting effect is It differs from the length of time required for the second lighting effect.).

According to this configuration 10, when informing that a jackpot game will be executed, the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect are executed at different execution times. As a result, it is possible to change the impression given to the player by each lighting effect.

(Composition 11)
The gaming machine according to configuration 11 is executed when the decorative symbols are displayed (eg, temporarily stopped) in a manner (eg, matching symbols) that informs that the jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of the special symbols. A light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect different from the first light emitting effect (for example, the effect image 61 related to the first light emitting effect and the effect image 62 related to the second light emitting effect are different images) can be executed. be.

According to this configuration 11, different light emitting effects can be executed twice when the decorative symbols are displayed in a mode of notifying that the big winning game is to be executed. Thus, it is possible to change the impression given to the player by each light emitting performance, and to effectively prevent the performance from becoming monotonous when informing the execution of the big winning game.

(Composition 12)
The gaming machine according to configuration 12, during the variable display of the special symbols, a specific light-emitting effect (for example, win luminous effect), and a predetermined luminous effect (e.g., ready-to-reach light-emitting effect, non-reach light-emitting effect, look-ahead) executed when decorative symbols are displayed in a mode (for example, loss mode) that does not notify execution of a jackpot game. chance eye light emitting effect, and the chance eye light emitting effect) can be executed. The number of executions of these light emission effects is the first number in the case of the first variation pattern, and the second number of times greater than the first number in the case of the second variation pattern.

According to this configuration 12, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the light emission effect according to the type of variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the production from becoming monotonous by giving a range to the production.

(Composition 13)
The gaming machine according to configuration 13, during the variable display of the special symbols, a specific light-emitting effect (for example, win luminous effect), and a predetermined luminous effect (e.g., ready-to-win light-emitting effect, non-reach mode) executed when decorative symbols are displayed in a mode (for example, ready-to-win mode or losing mode) in which the execution of the jackpot game is not notified. luminous effect, look-ahead chance luminous effect, and chance luminous effect) can be executed. The number of executions of the light emitting effect during the variable display of the special symbols differs between the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the middle symbol).

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the light emitting effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the production during the variable display of the special symbols from becoming monotonous.

(Composition 14)
The gaming machine according to configuration 14 includes a specific luminous effect (for example, a winning luminous effect) executed when displaying decorative symbols in a manner notifying that a jackpot game is to be executed during variable display of special symbols; Predetermined light emission effects (for example, ready-to-win light-on effect, non-reach light-on effect, foreseeing chance light-on effect, and relevant chance light-on effect) executed when decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that does not notify execution of a jackpot game directing) and can be executed. The light emitting effect can be executed a first number of times in the first game state (for example, normal game state), and can be executed a second number of times larger than the first number in the case of a second game state (for example, variable probability game state). is.

According to this configuration 14, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the light emitting effect between the first game state and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the game state is estimated based on the number of times the light emitting effect is executed.

(Composition 15)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 15, as light emission effects, a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a second ready-to-win pattern light-emitting effect) executed when displaying decorative symbols in a ready-to-win effect during a ready-to-win effect, and a jackpot game are executed. It is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect (for example, winning light emitting effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of notifying that. In the case of the first game state (for example, normal game state), it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect and a specific light emission effect. Moreover, when it is in the second game state (for example, variable probability game state), it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect without executing a predetermined light emission effect.

According to this configuration 15, in the second game state, a specific light emission effect can be executed without executing a predetermined light emission effect, and in the first game state, both of these light emission effects can be executed. be. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature that makes the player guess the game state depending on the presence or absence of the light emission effect during the ready-to-win effect.

(Composition 16)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 16, as the light emitting effect, a specific light emitting effect (for example, a winning light emitting effect) executed when displaying decorative symbols in a manner notifying that a jackpot game is to be executed, and a jackpot game are executed. A predetermined lighting effect (for example, a non-reach lighting effect, a look-ahead chance light emitting effect, and the chance eye light emitting effect) executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not notify that the be. When it is notified that the jackpot game is not to be executed and the ready-to-win effect is executed, the specific light-emitting effect and the predetermined light-emitting effect are not executed (for example, during the display of the ready-to-lose game, the winning light-emitting effect and the non-reach effect are not executed. do not execute lighting effects). When it is notified that the jackpot game is not to be executed and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the above-mentioned predetermined light-emitting effect can be executed (for example, while the losing eye other than the ready-to-win losing eye is being displayed, the light-emitting effect during non-reach is executed. Possible). When notifying that a jackpot game is to be executed, the above specific light emitting effect can be executed (for example, the first light emitting effect can be executed during the display of matching symbols).

According to this configuration 16, it is possible to execute the light emission effect when not executing the ready-to-win effect and not executing the jackpot game, and when notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emitting effect from being extremely low. Further, when the jackpot game is not executed and the ready-to-win effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming bored with the appearance of the light-emitting effect.

(Composition 17)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 17 performs the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect, which are executed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner to inform that the jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of the special symbols; is executable. When the ready-to-win effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, when notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, during the first game state (for example, normal game state) and during the second game state (for example, probability variation game state) Neither the first light emitting effect nor the second light emitting effect is executed (for example, the hit light emitting effect is not executed during the display of the ready-to-lose eye regardless of the game state). In the case of notifying execution of a jackpot game, the first light-emitting effect and the second light-emitting effect can be executed both during the first game state and during the second game state.

According to this configuration 17, regardless of the game state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are not executed when it is notified that the ready-to-win effect is executed and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, regardless of the gaming state, when notifying that the jackpot game is not to be executed, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are executed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the first game state and the second game state.

(Composition 18)
The gaming machine according to configuration 18 is capable of executing light emitting effects (for example, winning light emitting effect and non-reach light emitting effect) that are executed when decorative symbols are displayed during variable display of special symbols. When the ready-to-win effect is executed when the jackpot game is not executed, the above-mentioned light emitting effect is not executed (for example, the winning light-emitting effect and the light-emitting effect during the non-reach time are not executed while the ready-to-win losing eye is displayed), and the big win game is executed. If the ready-to-win effect is not executed when no ready-to-win effect is executed, the above-described light emitting effect can be executed (for example, the non-ready-to-miss light emitting effect can be executed while the losing eyes other than the ready-to-miss losing eyes are displayed). The light-emitting effects include a first light-emitting effect and a second light-emitting effect that are executed when decorative symbols are displayed in a mode for informing that a jackpot game will be executed. When executing a jackpot game, during the control in the first game state (for example, the normal game state), the first light emission effect and the second light emission at the first time (for example, the time longer than the execution time of the light emission effect during non-reach) It is possible to perform directing. During control in the second game state (for example, variable probability game state), the first A light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect can be executed.

According to this configuration 18, it is possible to execute the light emission effect when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed and when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed and the light-emitting effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light-emitting effect from becoming extremely low. Also, when a jackpot game is executed, the light emitting effect can be executed for an execution time corresponding to the game state.

(Composition 19)
The gaming machine according to configuration 19 is capable of executing the light emitting effect executed when displaying the decorative symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. The light-emitting effect includes a specific light-emitting effect (for example, winning light-emitting effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode for notifying that the big win game will be executed, and a mode that does not notify that the big win game is to be executed. There is a predetermined light emission effect (for example, non-reach light emission effect, look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect) executed when the decorative pattern is displayed. When notifying that the jackpot game is not to be executed, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the specific light-emitting effect and the predetermined light-emitting effect are not executed (for example, the winning light-emitting effect and the non-reach effect are not executed during the display of the ready-to-lose eyes. medium light emission effect is not executed), and if the reach effect is not executed, a predetermined light emission effect can be executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, while a losing eye other than a reach losing eye is displayed, a non-reach light emitting effect is specified execution time). When notifying that a jackpot game is to be executed, the specific light emitting effect can be executed at an execution time different from the predetermined execution time (for example, the predetermined execution time of the light emitting effect during the display of the matching symbols is can run at different execution times).

According to this configuration 19, the light emission effect can be executed when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the big win game is not executed, and when the big win game is executed. As a result, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed and the light-emitting effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light-emitting effect from becoming extremely low. In addition, it is possible to prevent the light emission effect from becoming monotonous by making the execution time of the specific light effect and the predetermined light effect different.

(Configuration 20)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 20 provides a predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect in which a chance up is executed) during the variable display of the special symbols, and until the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when notifying that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, a winning light emitting effect) to be executed. A light emitting means (for example, a board lamp 25 and/or a frame lamp 37) is caused to emit light in a first light emitting pattern during a predetermined effect, and a light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emitting pattern during the light emitting effect.

According to this configuration 20, it is possible to differentiate the light emission pattern during the predetermined effect and during the light emission effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide range of effects.

(Composition 21)
The gaming machine according to configuration 21 is capable of executing a light emitting effect that is executed when displaying decorative symbols during variable display of special symbols. The light emitting effect includes a specific light emitting effect (for example, winning light emitting effect) that is executed when displaying the decorative patterns in a mode for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed, and displaying the decorative patterns in the ready-to-win mode during the ready-to-win effect. There is a predetermined lighting effect (for example, the second ready-to-win pattern lighting effect) that is executed when the game is played. Light emitting means (e.g., board lamp 25 and/or frame lamp 37) emit light in a first light emitting pattern during a specific light emitting effect, and light emitting means emit light in a second light emitting pattern corresponding to a ready-to-win effect during a predetermined light emitting effect. Let

According to this configuration 21, a specific light emission effect and a predetermined light emission effect can be executed as the light emission effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the modes of light emitting effects. Further, since the light emitting means can emit light in the second light emission pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect during the predetermined light-emitting effect, the ready-to-win effect can be emphasized rather than the predetermined light-emitting effect.

(Composition 22)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 22, when displaying decorative symbols in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game may be played and does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emission effect (for example, chance eye light emission) is displayed. effect) and light a predetermined light-emitting means (for example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37) in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the predetermined light-emitting effect (lamp light-emitting effect corresponding to the chance eye). be. In the case of a big hit, when displaying a decorative pattern (symbol set) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played before the special pattern is stopped and displayed, a specific light-emitting effect (first light-emitting effect in the winning light-emitting effect and / Or second light emission effect) and light the light emitting means in a light emission pattern corresponding to the specific light emission effect (lamp light emission effect corresponding to the winning light emission effect).

According to configuration 22, in addition to configuration 6, a predetermined lighting effect or a specific lighting effect is performed, and the light emitting means is caused to emit light. Therefore, in addition to the effect of configuration 6, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in conjunction with each of the predetermined light emitting effect and the specific light emitting effect, thereby further enhancing interest.

1 pachinko game machine 5 liquid crystal display device 7 movable accessory 11 first start port 12 second start port 13 big winning port 24 speaker 25 board lamp 26 effect button 37 frame lamp 41 first special symbol display device 42 second special symbol display Vessel 51 Reserved icon 52 Reserved number 53 Fluctuation icon 55 Decorative pattern 56 Small pattern 57 4th pattern corresponding to the 1st special pattern 59 4th pattern corresponding to the 2nd special pattern 60 ~ 64 Effect image 70 Light-emitting effect during non-reach Image 80 Effect image 81 Reach line image 82 Effect image 91, 92 Effect image 101, 131, 141, 151 CPU
130 effect control unit 140 image sound control unit 150 lamp control unit 65 operation promotion image 651 effective period image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means and effect control means,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game;
identification information control means for stopping display after a predetermined time from variably displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a control information transmission means for transmitting predetermined control information,
The production control means is
capable of receiving the control information transmitted from the control information transmitting means;
A game effect can be executed in response to the reception,
In the game production,
The decorative pattern is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the determination means, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in accordance with the stop display of the identification information. Decorative pattern production to stop and display,
a ready-to-win effect which is an effect to expect the execution of the special game and which is executed when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode during the variable display;
an emphasizing effect for emphasizing the decorative pattern during the variable display;
and a notice effect for notifying the possibility that the special game will be executed,
In the emphasis effect,
a specific emphasis effect for highlighting the decorative symbols when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner to notify that the special game is to be executed;
a predetermined emphasizing effect, which is different from the specific emphasizing effect, for emphasizing the decorative design when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative design in the ready-to-win mode in the ready-to-win effect,
at least during the period during which the specific emphasis effect is being executed, the execution of the notice effect can be restricted;
The specific emphasizing effect includes a first specific emphasizing effect and a second specific emphasizing effect different from the first specific emphasizing effect,
In one variation, the second specific emphasis effect can be executed after the first specific emphasis effect,
The first specific emphasizing effect and the second specific emphasizing effect are terminated during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and the decoration is performed from the end of the second specific emphasizing effect to the end of the stop display of the decorative pattern. without highlighting the pattern,
This game machine does not execute the first specific emphasis performance and the second specific emphasis performance during the stop display of the decorative pattern.

Images